JP2014028097A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably dealing with fraudulence.SOLUTION: When an elapsed time after launching of a ball last is in excess of, for example, 30 sec., the number of balls is ensured that are stored in a supply passage 65. As a result, upon determination that the ball has been launched from a ball shooting unit 66 and flowed down in the front region of a game board 13 and that a sufficient time has elapsed before the ball returns again to the supply passage 65, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 can be ensured. Therefore, trouble and fraudulence generated during the game can be accurately determined by ensuring the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 at that point of time.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a predetermined number of game media are prepared in advance in the gaming machine, rather than receiving game media used in the game from the island facility or discharging the game media used in the game to the island facility. A so-called in-machine circulation type gaming machine is known in which the gaming medium is circulated in the gaming machine and used for gaming.

JP 2009-118869 A

  The in-machine circulation type gaming machine is configured so that the player cannot touch the game medium to be used, and has an advantage over the conventional game machine in that the illegal act is not easily performed on the game medium. However, there are few examples of introducing in-flight circulation gaming machines, and countermeasures against fraud are still insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately deal with fraud.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a storage means for storing game media, a launching means for launching a game medium supplied from the storage means, and a game medium launched by the launching means. And a discharge means for discharging the game medium recovered by the recovery means to the storage means, and playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, A first determination unit that determines the number of game media stored in the storage unit, and a case where all of the predetermined number of game media circulating in the gaming machine are to be stored in the storage unit. The second determining means for determining whether the number of game media stored in the storing means determined by the first determining means is the predetermined number, and the second determining means stores in the storing means. Been If the number of that game media is determined to be different numbers from the predetermined number, and a notification unit that performs a predetermined notification.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein one game medium is collected by the collecting unit after being discharged by the emitting unit, and is discharged and stored in the storing unit by the discharging unit. When the time required for the game machine to be the first time, the gaming machine is fired immediately before by the first counting means for counting the elapsed time from the time when the game medium is fired by the launching means, and the launching means. And a third judging means for judging whether the elapsed time counted from the first counting means with respect to the game medium is equal to or longer than the first time. Is determined by the third determining means that the elapsed time counted from the first counting means with respect to the game medium immediately before being emitted by the emitting means is equal to or longer than the first time. If the predetermined number of game media circulating in the gaming machine is to be stored in the storage means, the storage means determined by the first determination means is stored in the storage means. It is determined whether or not the number of game media being played is the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game medium is stored by the storage means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, and the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means The game medium collected by the collecting means is discharged by the discharging means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. The number of game media stored by the storage means is determined by the first determination means. When the predetermined number of game media circulating in the gaming machine is to be stored in the storage unit, the number of game media stored in the storage unit determined by the first determination unit is Whether the number is a predetermined number is determined by the second determination means. As a result, when it is determined by the second determination means that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, the notification means performs a predetermined notification. As a result, even if an illegal act or trouble occurs during a game and the number of gaming media circulating in the gaming machine changes, all the predetermined number of gaming media circulating in the gaming machine When it becomes a state to be stored in the storage means, it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, and predetermined notification is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the number of game media circulating in the game machine can be recognized at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, when the time required for one game medium to be collected by the collecting means and discharged to the storing means by the discharging means and stored is set as the first time, it is immediately released by the emitting means. When the third determining means determines that the elapsed time from the launch of the played game medium counted by the first counting means is equal to or longer than the first time, it circulates in the gaming machine. Assuming that all of the predetermined number of game media are to be stored in the storage means, a second determination is made as to whether the number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means is a predetermined number. Determined by means. Thereby, when the launch of the game medium is stopped for the first time or more, it is determined whether the number of the game media stored in the storage means is a predetermined number, and the game media stored in the storage means When it is determined that the number is different from the predetermined number, the notification unit performs a predetermined notification. Therefore, even if an illegal act or trouble occurs during the game and the number of game media circulating in the machine changes, the timing when the player pauses the game or ends the game Thus, it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, and predetermined notification is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the number of game media circulating in the game machine can be recognized at an early stage.

(A) is a front view of the pachinko machine and card sand apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a right view when the pachinko machine is seen from the front right side (arrow Ib direction). It is the front view which showed the state which removed the door frame from the pachinko machine. (A) is the front view which showed the state which removed the resin cover which covers an overhang | projection part from the state of FIG. 2, (b) is the case where the pachinko machine is seen from the IIIb direction shown to (a) FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is a figure for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing configurations of an inner frame 12 and a game board 30. (A) is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a cylinder lock, a sliding rod, and a photo sensor in the state in which the cylinder lock is not rotated, (b) is a rotation operation of the cylinder lock counterclockwise in front view. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of the cylinder lock, the sliding hook, and the photo sensor in the state which was made, (c) is the cylinder lock and the sliding hook in the state where the cylinder lock is rotated clockwise in front view. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship with a photosensor, (d) is the figure which showed schematic structure of the photosensor, (e) is the VIIIe-VIIIe line | wire partial sectional view of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a variation pattern table for jackpots. (D) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation (normal) variation pattern table, and (e) is a diagram schematically showing a variation (probability) variation pattern table. It is the shown schematic diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a counting device, a discharge control apparatus, and a card sand apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the prize ball process which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st ball number determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is the flowchart which showed the circulating ball number counting process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd ball number determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is the flowchart which showed the possessed ball number counting process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is the flowchart which showed the door frame open process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd number-of-balls determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th ball number determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end ball determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal time ball | bowl determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing configurations of an inner frame 12 and a game board 30. It is the schematic diagram which showed the internal structure of the out ball side stopping device typically, (a) shows the state of the out ball side stopping device at the normal time when the game is performed, (b) (C) shows the state of the out ball side stopping device when the power is turned on again and the ball stopped by the out ball side stopping device is caused to flow down. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl collection | recovery process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st ball number determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd ball number determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is the flowchart which showed the possessed ball number counting process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is the flowchart which showed the door frame open process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd number-of-balls determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the 4th ball number determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end ball determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal time ball | bowl determination process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process performed by the launch control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the counting device of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, a launch control apparatus, and a card sand apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process performed by the launch control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl collection | recovery process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process performed by the launch control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl collection | recovery process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process performed by the launch control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the counting device of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment, a launch control apparatus, and a card sand apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process performed by the launch control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ball | bowl collection | recovery process performed by MPU in a counting device. It is the figure which showed the transmission system of the command and signal which are transmitted / received between each control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment, which is an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10, will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1, the external structure of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the card sand device 70 will be described. FIG. 1A is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 and the card sand device 70, and FIG. 1B is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front right side (in the direction of arrow Ib).

  The card sand device 70 is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each pachinko machine 10, installed on the left side (or right side) of the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and connected to the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 can play a game within the range of the amount of bills inserted into the corresponding card sanding device 70 or the saving data (remaining amount) recorded in a member card described later inserted into the card sanding device 70. Lend a ball to the person. The player can play a game in the pachinko machine 10 using the rented ball (rental ball) and the ball paid out by the game (prize ball) as possession balls.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not receive the balls used in the game from the island facility or discharge the balls used for the game to the island facility. 50 balls) are prepared in the pachinko machine 10 in advance, and the balls are circulated in the pachinko machine 10 and used for games. This in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10 does not have a conventional payout device, and does not lend or pay out balls directly to the player, and quantifies the rental balls and prize balls (as points). Granted to the player.

  This in-machine circulation pachinko machine 10 collects the balls from the conventional island equipment, that is, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment, cleans the collected balls, and distributes them to each pachinko machine 10 again. Island facilities with large-scale mechanisms can be eliminated. Therefore, in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is introduced, the cost for the island facilities can be reduced. In addition, since it is not necessary to stop all pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facilities in order to inspect and maintain the island facilities, inspection and maintenance can be performed for each pachinko machine 10, so the operating rate of the pachinko machines 10 can be increased. Can be raised.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a non-magnetic sphere that is not attracted by a magnet, for example, an austenitic stainless steel sphere is used as a game sphere (hereinafter simply referred to as “sphere”). As a result, an illegal act in which the player uses the magnet to change the flow direction of the ball, or a game area which will be described later is held without flowing down, and the game area is released when the game area is released. It prevents fraudulent acts that do something special.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 17 at two positions on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 17 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side (front side). When the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11.

  The inner frame 12 is made of a synthetic resin, specifically, ABS (acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) resin. ABS resin is suitable as a constituent material of the inner frame 12 because it has a low material cost, has a good paste such as plating, has a good decorative property, and has a high impact resistance.

  In the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 4) described later having a large number of nails, winning holes 3, 4, 5a, etc. in the region 2/3 to 3/4 on the upper side when viewed from the front is detachable from the back side. Installed. A ball ball game is performed by the ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13.

  In addition, the inner frame 12 has a projecting portion 16 that projects to the front front side (front side) in the lower part of the front view, that is, below the area where the game board 13 is mounted. Although details will be described later, a ball launching unit 66 that launches a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball immediately after being launched from the ball launching unit 66 are inside the projecting portion 16. A launch rail 63 that leads to the front area of the game board 13, and a supply passage 65 that stores the balls used for the game collected from the front area of the game board 13 and supplies the balls to be fired next to the ball launch unit 66. Are mainly disposed (see FIG. 3). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is an in-flight circulation pachinko machine, and unlike an ordinary pachinko gaming machine, the inner frame 12 omits an upper plate and a lower plate for storing balls. Has been.

  The overhanging portion 16 is covered with a cover made of resin (for example, ABS resin), and the cover is configured so that it cannot be opened and closed and cannot be removed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Accordingly, at least the ball stored in the supply passage 65 is configured not to be touched by the player, and the player is not allowed to make any illegal action against the ball used in the pachinko machine 10 stored in the supply passage 65. It is possible to prevent an act (for example, an illegal act such as changing a ball or changing the movement of the ball in the game area by oiling the ball).

  A data display 24 for displaying the player's possessed ball as a score is disposed on the upper portion of the overhanging portion 16 as viewed from the front. The data display 24 displays a score obtained by subtracting the total number of balls fired on the front surface of the game board 13 from the total number of rented balls and prize balls as the number of possessed balls (number of possessed balls) of the player. For example, a plurality of digits can be displayed by a plurality of 7-segment LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). By disposing the data display 24 on the front front side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, on the upper front side of the overhanging portion 16 projecting to the player side, the player shifts his eyes slightly from the game board 13. Only you can check the current number of possessed balls. Therefore, since the time to look away from the game board 13 can be reduced, the number of possessed balls can be confirmed without any trouble in the game.

  An operation handle 39 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed on the lower right side of the overhanging portion 16 when viewed from the front. Inside the operation handle 39, a ball launch unit 66 is provided. The touch sensor 39a for permitting the driving of the motor, the push button-type stop switch 39b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operating handle 39 by changing the electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) for detection is incorporated.

  When the operation handle 39 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 39a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 39 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 39a and the stop switch 39b are off.

  A door frame (also referred to as a “glass frame”) 14 is provided on the front side of the area where the game board 13 is mounted in the inner frame 12. In order to support the door frame 14, metal hinges 18 are attached at two locations on the left side of the front view of the area where the game board 13 is mounted in the inner frame 12. The door frame 14 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side (front side) with the side on which the hinge 18 is provided as an opening / closing axis. When the door frame 14 is closed, the door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  The inner frame 12 has a locking device 20 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, at the center lower portion in front view of the end portion (right end portion in front view) on the side separated from the opening / closing shaft of the inner frame 12 and the opening / closing shaft of the door frame 14. The cylinder lock 21a which comprises is arrange | positioned. The locking of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the locking of the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21b of the cylinder lock 21a and performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned counterclockwise, the locking of the inner frame 12 is unlocked. On the other hand, when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned clockwise, the door frame 14 is unlocked.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 8 (e), the door frame 14 in the present embodiment is locked with the electronic lock 99 provided on the inner frame 12 with respect to the protruding portion 96 a provided on the door frame 14. The engagement rod 99a is engaged. When the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned clockwise during the game, the pachinko machine 10 stops the ball firing in the ball launching unit 66, and the ball fired before the stop is the front area of the game board 13 After the passage of sufficient time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds after the sphere has stopped firing) to pass through the supply passage 65 again, the engagement rod 99a of the electronic lock 99 and the protrusion of the door frame 14 protrude. The door frame 14 is unlocked by electrically releasing the engaged state with the portion 96a. Thereby, even if the unlocking of the door frame 14 is instructed by inserting the key into the keyhole 21b and turning it rightward during the game, the ball fired during the game is in front of the game board 13. During the flow down, at least the door frame 14 can be kept closed. Therefore, when the door frame 14 is opened, the ball can be stored in the supply passage 65 covered with the cover, so that the player can not touch the ball built in the pachinko machine 14, It is possible to prevent cheating.

  The door frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 14a having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit (not shown) having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the door frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 mounted on the inner frame 12 through the glass unit is the front of the pachinko machine 10. Visible to the side.

  The door frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the door frame 14. These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 14a, there are provided electrical decoration portions 32 to 36 that incorporate light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 32 to 36 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the illumination parts 32 to 36 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, a display lamp 31 is provided in the upper left part of the front view of the door frame 14 (refer to FIG. 1). The display lamp 31 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is paid out and when an error occurs.

  The lower part of the door frame 14 protrudes to the front front side (front side), and an operation unit 23 is provided at a substantially central position of the protruding part. The operation unit 23 is an input device that receives an operation instruction from a player, and includes a joystick 23a, an operation button 23b disposed on the left side of the joystick 23a, and an operation button disposed on the right side of the joystick 23a. 23c. When the joystick 23a and the operation buttons 23b and 23c are operated by the player, the pachinko machine 10 changes the images displayed in various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 to be described later, so that the player Is expected to be a big hit. As a result, the player can actively participate in the game.

  Here, by providing the operation part 23 in the door frame 14, the following effects can be acquired. That is, since the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is an in-machine circulation type pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 10 has a mechanism for circulating a ball such as a supply passage 65 that is not provided in a normal pachinko machine. Conventionally, when replacing a pachinko machine, the entire pachinko machine was removed from the island facility and replaced. However, the in-machine circulation pachinko machine has a mechanism for circulating balls in the machine, so the unit price of one pachinko machine is It is higher than a normal pachinko machine, and as a result, the cost required to replace the pachinko machine is higher.

  It is the shape of the game board 13 and the door frame 14 that is greatly different in each model and model of the pachinko machine. Therefore, when the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 including the mechanism for circulating the ball in the machine are shared by each model and model, and the pachinko machine is replaced, the door frame 14 and the game board 13 are exchanged. By doing so, the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 can be reused for each model and model, so that the cost for replacing the pachinko machine can be kept low.

  And when replacing a pachinko machine in this way, if the operation part 23 is provided in the door frame 14 like this embodiment, when replacing a pachinko machine, the operation part 23 can be replaced together with the door frame 14. it can. Therefore, the configuration and design of the operation unit 23 can be easily changed for each model / model.

  The overhanging portion of the door frame 14 provided with the operation unit 23 is disposed on the upper side of the overhanging portion 16 of the inner frame 14. As a result, since the operation unit 23 is supported not only by the door frame 14 but also by the inner frame 14, a strong force is exerted on the operation unit 23 by the player, such as pressing down the operation unit 23, particularly in the downward direction in front view. Even so, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 23 and the door frame 14 that supports the operation unit 23 from being destroyed.

  A level meter 22 is disposed on the door frame 14 above the cylinder lock 21a. The level meter 22 indicates the passage of time until the door frame 14 is unlocked when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned clockwise during the game. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 unlocks the door frame 14 after 30 seconds have passed since the ball was stopped when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b was turned clockwise during the game. Lock. The level meter 22 indicates to the player the passage of 30 seconds.

  The level meter 22 has five circular areas arranged in a row in a row, and one circular area so as to be arranged further above the uppermost area of the rectangular area. It is arranged. The five rectangular regions and one circular region are provided with LEDs, respectively. The LEDs provided in each area of the level meter 22 are turned off during normal times. When the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned clockwise during the game, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an LED provided in the bottom rectangular area after 5 seconds have passed since the ball was stopped. When 5 seconds have passed (when 10 seconds have passed since the ball was stopped), the LED provided in the second rectangular area from the bottom is turned on. Whenever 5 seconds elapses, the LEDs provided in the rectangular area are turned on in order from the bottom, and when 30 seconds have elapsed since the launch of the sphere is stopped, the LED is provided above the rectangular area. The LED in the circular area is turned on. Then, the door frame 14 is unlocked.

  Thereby, since the time elapsed until the door frame 30 is unlocked until the door frame 30 is unlocked after turning the key inserted into the keyhole 21b to the right, it is possible to visually recognize the time until unlocking. The progress of the waiting time can be communicated to the player, and the psychological burden felt during the waiting can be reduced.

  A small window 37 is formed on the lower right side of the window portion 14a by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the door frame 14 can be seen, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 4). A stamp or the like affixed to the pachinko machine 10 is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 31 to 36 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A card sand device 70 is arranged on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. The card sand device 70 is provided with a bill insertion slot 71 for inserting bills and a card insertion slot 72 for inserting a membership card. When a player inserts a membership card into the card insertion slot 72 and confirms the validity of the inserted membership card (that is not fraudulent), the saved data (remaining amount) stored in the membership card, Or, within the range of the amount of the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 71, it becomes possible to lend the rented ball to the player.

  Below the bill insertion slot 71, a remaining amount display unit 73 for displaying the bills inserted into the bill insertion slot 71 and the remaining amount of the membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 72 is disposed, and the remaining amount display is displayed. A lending button 74 for obtaining a lending ball is disposed below the portion 73 (lower side in FIG. 1). When the player operates the lending button 74, the number of possessed balls displayed on the data display 37 is added by the number of lending balls that are lent as long as there is a remaining amount in the banknote or the membership card.

  Below the lending button 74 (lower side in FIG. 1), a return button 75 for requesting the return of the member card inserted into the card insertion slot 72 is arranged. When the return button 75 is pressed, the card sand device 70 receives the number of possessed balls displayed on the data display 24 at that time from the pachinko machine 10, converts the points at a predetermined exchange rate, and converts the converted points. Is cumulatively added to the savings data on the membership card. Then, the member card storing the accumulated and added saving data is discharged from the card insertion slot 72.

  The card sand device 70 is also provided with a sphere unit price display lamp 76, a card usable lamp 78, a rentable lamp 79a, and an error display lamp 79b as various lamps.

  The sphere unit price display lamp 76 is a lamp that displays the sphere unit price (lending rate) of the rented ball, a lamp that is lit when the sphere unit price is 1 yen, a lamp that is lit when the sphere unit price is 2 yen, A lamp that is turned on when the unit price of the ball is 4 yen is provided. The lending rate is transmitted from the hall computer 263 (see FIG. 12) to the card sand device 70 and set in advance. For example, when the power is turned on to the card sand device 70, the hall computer 263 transmits a rate signal related to the lending rate corresponding to the card sand device 70 to the card sand device 70. Then, the card sand device 70 that has received the rate signal stores the lending rate specified by the rate signal in a predetermined area of the RAM 273 (see FIG. 12) in the card sand device 70, thereby setting the lending rate. To do. The ball unit price display lamp 76 is lit according to the set rental rate (ball unit price). The player knows the sphere unit price (exchange rate) of the rented ball in the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to the card sand device 70 provided with the sphere unit price display lamp 76 by the lamp lit by the sphere unit price display lamp 76. Can do.

  The card usable lamp 78 is a lamp for notifying whether or not a member card can be inserted into the card insertion slot 72. When the card sand device 70 is in a state where a member card can be inserted into the card insertion slot 72, the card usable lamp 78 is turned on. The player can determine whether or not a membership card can be inserted into the card sand device 70 based on the lighting state of the card usable lamp 78.

  Note that the card sand device 70, after turning on the power, until the lending rate is set and the counting device 111 (to be described later) receives a counting permission signal indicating that the number of possessed balls can be counted. The card usable lamp 78 is not turned on, and the standby state in which the acceptance of the membership card is not permitted. That is, the rate signal serves as a lending permission signal from the hall computer 263 to the card sand device 70. Then, when the setting of the lending rate is completed, the card sand device 30 turns on the card available lamp 78 to notify the player that the member card can be accepted.

  The lendable lamp 79a is a lamp for informing the player whether or not the ball can be rented. The lendable lamp 79a is turned on when a ball can be rented. During normal times, the card sanding device 70 turns off the lendable lamp 79a. Only when the member card is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 and it is confirmed that the member card is not a fraudulent one but a legitimate one, the card sand device 70 lights the lendable lamp 79a, and the game Informs the person that the ball can be rented. On the other hand, when the membership card is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 and the legitimacy of the membership card cannot be confirmed, the card sand device 70 keeps the lendable lamp 79a unlit, and the ball from the player Reject the loan request. In addition, acceptance of banknotes into the banknote slot 71 is not permitted. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the member card inserted into the card insertion slot 72 cannot lend a ball, and that the ball cannot be lent based on cash. In this case, the player can call the hall clerk and take measures such as having the data stored in the membership card be checked for destruction.

  Thus, in this pachinko machine 10, in order to play a game using a ball, it is essential to insert a valid member card into the card insertion slot 72.

  The error display lamp 79b is a lamp that lights when a predetermined error occurs. The card sand device 70 turns on the error display lamp 79b when a predetermined error is detected inside. For example, when it is confirmed that the membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 72 is not valid and is illegal, the error display lamp 79b is turned on. The hall clerk can recognize that a predetermined error has occurred in the card sanding device 70 by confirming that the error display lamp 79b is turned on. Thereby, the store clerk in the hall can deal with an error that has occurred in the card sand device 70.

  Next, the details of the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a state in which the door frame 14 is removed from the pachinko machine 10. 3A is a front view showing a state in which the resin cover that covers the overhanging portion 16 is further removed from the state of FIG. 2, and FIG. 3B is a plan view of the overhanging portion 16 from the pachinko machine 10. It is an enlarged view at the time of seeing the pachinko machine 10 from the IIIb direction shown to Fig.3 (a) in the state which removed the resin-made covers which cover a. 2 and 3 (a), for convenience, the structure in the game area on the surface of the game board 13 is shown as blank.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3A, the inner frame 12 is mainly configured by a resin base 40 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially circular window hole 41 is formed at the center of the resin base 40. Has been. A game board 13 is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the resin base 40. The game board 13 is composed of a quadrangular plywood, and its peripheral edge is attached in a state where it abuts against the back side of the resin base 40 (inner frame 12). Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface portion of the game board 13 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 41 of the resin base 40.

  The resin base 40 is provided with a substantially rectangular small window 47 at the lower right portion of the window hole 41. As will be described later, a sticking space K1 is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and a sticker or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is small when the game board 13 is mounted on the rear side of the resin base 40. It can be visually recognized through the window 47. It is also possible to attach a sticker or the like from the small window 47.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (a), a ball is placed inside the overhanging portion 16 projecting toward the front side (front side) of the inner frame 12 below the area where the game board 13 is mounted. A ball launch unit 66 that launches to the front area of 13, a launch rail 63 that guides the ball immediately after being launched from the ball launch unit 66 to the front area of the game board 13, and a recovery from the front area of the game board 13. A supply passage 65 for storing a ball used for a game and supplying a ball to be subsequently launched to the ball launch unit 66 is mainly disposed.

  The ball launch unit 66 includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are driven by a launch control device 112 (see FIG. 12) described later. The firing control device 112 receives a firing permission instruction from the counting device 111 to be described later, detects that the player is touching the operation handle 39 by the touch sensor 39a, and stops the ball to stop firing. On condition that the switch 39b is off (not operated), the firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 39, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 39.

  The firing rail 63 is fixedly attached to the resin base 40 via a metal plate 62 behind the firing rail 63, and is configured to extend linearly at a predetermined firing angle (launch angle). Accordingly, the ball launched by the ball launch unit 66 in accordance with the turning operation of the operation handle 39 is first launched obliquely upward along the launch rail 63, and thereafter, two later-described two provided on the game board 13. The game area is guided through a ball guide path 60 formed by rails 61 and 62.

  A gap having a predetermined interval is formed between the launch rail 63 and the outer rail 62 provided on the game board 13, and a foul ball passage 64 is formed below the gap. The foul ball passage 64 is connected to the supply passage 65. When the ball launched from the ball launch unit 66 does not reach the return ball prevention member 68 and returns to the ball guide passage as a foul ball, the foul ball Is discharged and stored in the supply passage 65 via the foul ball passage 64. Thus, the foul ball is supplied again to the ball launch unit 65 through the supply passage 65 and is launched toward the front area of the game board 13.

  A foul ball detection switch 93 is provided in the foul ball passage 64. The foul sphere detection switch 93 detects a sphere that has passed through the foul sphere passage 64, and the detection result is output to a counting device 111 (see FIG. 12) described later. The counting device 111 counts the spheres stored in the supply passage 65, and the spheres stored in the supply passage 65 when a sphere that has passed through the foul sphere passage 64 is detected by the foul sphere detection switch 93. 1 (the value of the circulating ball number memory 213c shown in FIG. 12) is incremented by one.

  As described above, the supply passage 65 stores balls that are launched toward the front area of the game board 13 and supplies the balls one by one to the ball launch unit 66. In the present embodiment, 50 balls are stored in the pachinko machine 10, and the player is allowed to play a game while circulating the 50 balls. When no game is played, 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65.

  In the supply passage 65, the left end 65a in front view is connected to a discharge passage 42 (see FIG. 7) provided on the back side of the game board 13. The ball that has flowed down the front area of the game board 13 is once discharged to the back of the game board 13 from various winning holes 3, 4, 5a (see FIG. 4) described later provided on the game board 13 and the out port 6. It is supplied from the end portion 65a to the supply passage 66 through the discharge passage 42 (see FIG. 7) provided on the back surface of the game board 13. Further, the supply passage 65 is connected to the foul ball passage 64 on the right side of the end portion 65 a, and a sphere that has returned to the ball guide passage as a foul ball is supplied from the foul ball passage 64 to the supply passage 65.

  The supply passage 65 is formed in a Z shape with an inclination from the left end portion 65a in front view toward the right end portion 65b in front view, and the width of the passage (width in the front-rear direction in the front view). ) Is set to a range in which spheres can pass one by one (for example, a range of 1.3 to 1.8 times the diameter of the sphere). Thereby, the sphere supplied from the end portion 65a and the foul ball passage 64 flows down toward the end portion 65b one by one. The end 65b is provided with a gate (not shown) that can be opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown), and the gate is normally closed. Therefore, the spheres supplied from the end portion 65a and the foul sphere passage 65 are sequentially retained one by one from the end portion 65b by the gate of the end portion 65b and stored in the supply passage 65.

  The solenoid that opens and closes the gate of the end portion 65b is driven by the launch control device 112 immediately before the ball launch unit 66 launches a ball by driving the launch control device 112, and the gate of the end portion 65b is opened. In the vicinity of the gate of the end portion 65b, the lower surface of the supply passage 65 is provided with a gradient so that the firing unit 166 side is lowered. Thereby, when the gate of the end portion 65 b is opened, the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 rolls toward the sphere launch unit 66, and the sphere is supplied to the sphere launch unit 66.

  A ball feed detection switch 94 is provided between the gate of the end portion 65 b of the supply passage 65 and the ball launch unit 66. The ball feed detection switch 94 is a switch that detects supply of a sphere from the end 65 b of the supply passage 65 to the sphere launch unit 66. When it is detected by the ball feed detection switch 94 that one ball has been supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66, a solenoid that opens and closes the gate of the end portion 65b is driven by the launch control device 112, and the end portion The gate of 65b is closed again. Thereby, just before a ball is launched by the ball launch unit 66, only one ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66. Then, the ball supplied here is launched by the ball launch unit 66 toward the entire area of the game version 13.

  The detection result of the ball feed detection switch 94 is also output to a counting device 111 (see FIG. 12) described later. The counting device 111 counts the spheres stored in the supply passage 65, and when the sphere supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball firing unit 66 is detected by the feed ball feed detection switch 94, the supply passage 65. 1 is subtracted from the number of stored spheres (the value of the circulating sphere number memory 213c shown in FIG. 12).

  Although details will be described later, in the counting device 111, the ball feed detection switch 94 measures the time when the sphere supplied from the supply passage 65 to the sphere launch unit 66 is not detected. 30 seconds (that is, enough for the ball to be supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66 and then fired by the ball launching unit 66 to flow down the front area of the game board 13 and return to the supply passage 65 again. If the ball launch is stopped (or the game is stopped by the player), all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are determined to be stored in the supply passage 65. To do.

  At this time, the counting device 111 confirms the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 and confirms whether there is any change in the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10. And, if there is a change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that some trouble has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 or that some sort of fraud has been performed on the pachinko machine 10. Judgment is made and this is notified by voice or lighting of the display lamp 31.

  In a conventional in-machine circulation pachinko machine, the number of balls stored in the machine is confirmed only when the power is turned on in a state where the balls are reliably stored in the supply passage 65. The number of balls stored in the plane is checked only when the power is turned on. Basically, the balls are dispersed in various places (launch rail, ball guide passage, front area of the game board, etc.) during the game. This is because it is difficult to accurately determine the number of spheres stored in the aircraft. However, if a trouble occurs or an illegal act is performed during the game, it cannot be recognized at an early stage.

  In this embodiment, 30 seconds after the ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66, that is, the ball is launched by the ball launch unit 66, flows down the front area of the game board 13, and returns to the supply passage 65 again. Even when it is determined that a sufficient time has passed before the arrival, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is confirmed, and whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed. Confirm. In addition, when the return button 75 of the card sand device 77 is operated and the adjustment processing of the possessed ball for the player to finish the game is executed, the supply passage is also 30 seconds after the ball is stopped from firing. The number of spheres stored in 65 is confirmed, and it is confirmed whether or not there is any change in the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, when all the round effects in the single hit of the pachinko machine 10 (the effect of opening the specific winning opening 5a) are finished and the ending effect is started, the ball is stopped to fire at the start, Even after 30 seconds have elapsed from the stop of the launch of the sphere, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is confirmed, and it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10.

  As a result, not only immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, but also when the player has temporarily stopped the game due to a break or the like, or after the end of the game and all round effects in one jackpot have ended, and the player takes a breath Since the number of balls stored in the plane can be confirmed when the game is on, etc., troubles and frauds occurring during the game can be confirmed early. Further, when it is determined that a sufficient time has passed before the ball is fired by the ball launching unit 66, flows down the front area of the game board 13, and returns to the supply passage 65 again, it is stored in the supply passage 65. Since the number of balls is checked, if no trouble or fraud has occurred, then all the balls circulating in the plane should be stored in the supply passage 65. Therefore, by confirming the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 at that time, it is possible to accurately determine the trouble or fraud that has occurred during the game.

  In addition, it is desirable to perform the ending effect performed after the end of all round effects in one jackpot for at least 31 seconds. In order to confirm the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65, it is necessary to stop the ball from firing for at least 30 seconds after the launch is stopped. By giving, the player can be released from the dissatisfaction that the ball cannot fire. In addition, in the ending effect, some game effect is displayed to indicate the subsequent game state to the player, or a notice effect that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery performed on the ball held at that time You may make it perform. Thereby, a player can be released from the boring feeling by ending production becoming long.

  As described above, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is based on the sphere currency supplied to the supply passage 65 detected by various switches and the sphere currency discharged from the supply passage 65. In addition to counting by 111, it is also possible to make a determination by the 50 ball detection switch 92 and the 51 ball detection switch 91 provided in the supply passage 65.

  The 50-ball detection switch 92 is a switch provided at a position where the 50th ball is held from the end 65b side when the balls are stored one by one in order from the end 65b in the supply passage 65. It is. When a sphere exists at this position, the 50-sphere detection switch 92 is turned on. When no sphere exists at this position, the 50-sphere detection switch 92 is turned off.

  The 51-ball detection switch 91 is a switch provided at a position where the 51st ball is held from the end 65b side when the balls are stored one by one in order from the end 65b in the supply passage 65. It is. When a sphere exists at this position, the 51 sphere detection switch 91 is turned on. When no sphere exists at this position, the 51 sphere detection switch 91 is turned off.

  The detection result of the 50 ball detection switch 92 and the detection result of the 51 ball detection switch 91 are output to the counting device 111 described later, and from these detection results, the balls stored in the supply passage 65 by the counting device 111. Is determined. That is, when it is confirmed in the counting device 111 that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is kept on for a predetermined time, it is determined that at least 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65. Further, when it is confirmed in the counting device 111 that the 51-sphere detection switch 91 is kept on for a predetermined time, it is determined that at least 51 spheres are stored in the supply passage 65.

  When it is determined from the detection result of the 50-ball detection switch 92 that at least 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65 and from the detection result of the 51-ball detection switch 91 that 51 balls are not stored in the supply passage 65 It can be determined that 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65. Therefore, when it can be determined that all the 50 balls that should be stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it is determined that the 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65. The counting device 111 determines that no trouble or fraud has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 and that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state.

  When it is determined from the detection result of the 50-ball detection switch 92 that at least 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65, and from the detection result of the 51-ball detection switch 91, at least 51 balls are stored in the supply passage 65 It can be determined that 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. Therefore, when all 50 balls that should have been stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it can be determined that 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. In some cases, the counting device 111 determines that there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as illegally mixing balls in the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that there is a high possibility that a ball is clogged inside the supply passage 65, and this is indicated. Notify as an over error.

  From the detection result of the 50 ball detection switch 92, it is determined that 50 balls are not stored in the supply passage 65, and from the detection result of the 51 ball detection switch 91, 51 balls are not stored in the supply passage 65. In this case, it can be determined that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is less than 50. Therefore, when it can be determined that all the 50 balls that should be stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it is determined that the 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65. The counting device 111 determines that there is a high possibility that a trouble such as a ball clogging has occurred in the front area of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10, and notifies that as an under error.

  On the other hand, when all 50 balls that should have been stored in the pachinko machine 10 are to be stored in the supply passage 65, the 50 balls in the supply passage 65 are detected from the detection result of the 50-ball detection switch 92. If it is determined that at least 51 spheres are stored in the supply passage 65 from the detection result of the 51 sphere detection switch 91, at least one of the 50 sphere detection switch 92 and the 51 sphere detection switch 91 is not stored. Is likely to be out of order. Therefore, in this case, the counting device 111 notifies the switch error that there is a high possibility that at least one of the 50-ball detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 has failed.

  The detection result of the 51 ball detection switch 91 is also monitored by the counting device 111 during the game. As described above, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is 50, and the position where the 51-sphere detection switch 91 is provided, that is, the spheres are arranged one by one in order from the end portion 65b in the supply passage 65. If the ball is stored, the ball does not stop at the position where the 51st ball from the end 65b side is held. That is, the 51 ball detection switch 91 only detects the passage of a ball during the game. Nevertheless, the 51 ball detection switch 91 of the supply passage 65 is provided when the presence of a ball is detected in the 51 ball detection switch 91 for at least a time longer than the time required for passing the ball during the game. It can be determined that there is a high possibility that the ball has stopped at the position and that an illegal act such as illegally mixing the ball with the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that the ball is clogged inside the supply passage 65.

  Therefore, in the counting device 111, if the 51 ball detection switch 91 is continuously turned on for a predetermined time during the game, whether or not an illegal act such as illegally mixing balls into the pachinko machine 10 has been performed or supplied It is determined that there is a high possibility that ball clogging has occurred inside the passage 65, and this is reported as an over error. As a result, the possibility that an illegal act such as illegally mixing a ball into the pachinko machine 10 during the game or that a ball is clogged inside the supply passage 65 is detected at an early stage. Recognize related parties.

  During the game, when the balls are stored one by one in order from the end portion 65b in the supply passage 65, the ball must stop at the position where the 50th ball is retained from the end portion 65b side. Nor. Therefore, if the 50-ball detection switch 91 is continuously turned on for a predetermined time during the game, an illegal act such as illegally mixing balls in the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or a ball in the supply passage 65 It may be determined that there is a high possibility that clogging has occurred, and this may be reported as an over error.

  The supply passage 65 is further provided with a minimum number sphere detection switch 90 as a switch for detecting a sphere. During the game, that is, while the balls are being launched toward the game area, at least a predetermined number A of balls (10 balls in the present embodiment) are stored in the supply passage 65. The minimum number of sphere detection switch 90 is a predetermined number A (that is, tenth) pieces from the end 65b side when spheres are stored one by one in order from the end 65b in the supply passage 65. It is a switch provided at a position where the ball is fastened. When a sphere exists at this position, the least-sphere detection switch 90 is turned on. When no sphere exists at this position, the least-sphere detection switch 90 is turned off.

  The detection result of the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is output to the counting device 111. Here, normally, even during the game, since the ball is stored at the position of the supply passage provided with the minimum number of balls detection switch 90, the ball is supplied to the launch unit 66 and stored. Except during the time when the sphere being moved moves toward the end 65b, the minimum sphere detection switch 90 is kept on. Therefore, when the ball is supplied to the launch unit 66, the supply of the minimum number of balls detection switch 90 is continued for a longer time than the period in which the stored sphere moves toward the end 65b. It can be determined that the sphere is not stored at the position of the passage 65 where the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is provided. In this case, there is a possibility that a ball that has been launched in the front area of the game board 13 cannot be collected in the supply passage 65 due to a clogged ball in the front area of the game board 13 or the like. is there.

  Therefore, in the counting device 111, when the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is continuously turned off for a predetermined time during the game, a ball clogging has occurred in the front area of the game board 13, and so on. It is determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble has occurred in which the ball launched into the front area of the ball cannot be collected in the supply passage 65, and this is reported as an under error. Thereby, when trouble etc. generate | occur | produce during a game, it can be made to recognize a game player or a hall related person at an early stage.

  Note that the minimum number of sphere detection switch 90 is the Bth from the end 65b side (provided that 0 <B <A) when the spheres are stored one by one in order from the end 65b in the supply passage 65. A may be provided at a position of at least the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 while the balls are being launched toward the game area. However, more under errors can be detected as the attachment position of the minimum number of sphere detection switch 90 is closer to the Ath position from the end 65b side.

  A ball extraction passage 67 for extracting a sphere stored from the supply passage 65 is connected to the lower side of the end portion 65 b of the supply passage 65 in front view. The ball removal passage 67 communicates with the back side of the inner frame 21, and an outlet 67 b is provided on the back side of the inner frame 21. The sphere extracted from the supply passage 65 is discharged from the outlet 67 b on the back side of the inner frame 21.

  A gate (not shown) is provided at a connecting portion 67a between the supply passage 65 and the ball removal passage 67, and the gate is normally closed. Therefore, normally, the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 is not discharged from the ball removal passage 67.

  A lever 67 c that opens and closes the gate is attached to a gate provided in a connection portion 67 a between the supply passage 65 and the ball passage 67. The lever 67c is disposed on the right side of the ball removal passage 67 when viewed from the front, and a spring provided between the lever 67c and the ball launching unit 66 applies force to the lever 67c in the direction of the left when viewed from the front. Is energized. The lever 67c maintains the gate closed state by the biasing by the spring.

  The lever 67c is configured to be able to be pulled toward the right side of the front view. When the lever 67c is pulled in the right direction when viewed from the front, the gate provided in the connecting portion 67c is opened in accordance with the pull, and the supply passage 65 and the ball removal passage 67 communicate with each other. Thereby, the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the ball removal passage 67. When the pulling force applied to the lever 67c in the right direction in the front view is released, the lever 67c returns to the position before being pulled by the biasing force of the spring provided between the ball launching unit 66 and again. The gate provided in the connecting portion 67c is closed, and the communication between the supply passage 65 and the ball removal passage 67 is released. Thereby, it can be set as the state where the ball stored in supply passage 65 is not extracted.

  The lever 67c is covered with a resin cover provided on the overhanging portion 16, and cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The lever 67c can be operated only from the back side of the inner frame 21. Therefore, the balls stored in the supply passage 65 can be extracted only by unlocking the inner frame 21 and opening the back side of the inner frame 21 (hall personnel). When a person concerned in the hall is informed that trouble or fraud has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 from the counting device 111, the hall person operates the lever 67 c by opening the back side of the inner frame 21 and stores it in the supply passage 65. The extracted sphere can be extracted to check whether the sphere has any problem.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the ball launch unit 66, the launch rail 63, the supply passage 65, and the ball removal passage 67 provided inside the overhang portion 16 are also made of a resin cover provided in the overhang portion 16. Covered by. The cover is configured so that it cannot be opened and closed and cannot be removed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, it is configured so that the player cannot touch at least the balls stored in the supply passage 65, and the player does not perform any illegal acts (for example, exchange the balls) against the balls used in the pachinko machine 10. Or illegal actions such as changing the movement of the ball in the game area by oiling the ball).

  On the right side of the resin base 40 as viewed from the front, an insertion hole 48 for inserting a later-described protrusion 96a (see FIG. 6E) provided in the door frame 14 is provided. Normally, the protrusion 96a inserted into the insertion hole 48 is engaged by an electronic lock 99 (see FIG. 6 (e)) provided on the back side of the resin base 40, and locks the door frame 14. When the engagement of the protruding portion 96a by the electronic lock 99 is released, the protruding portion 96a can be extracted from the insertion hole 48, and the door frame 14 engaged with the inner frame 12 is removed from the inner frame 12. It can be opened.

  Next, the details of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is a front view showing a configuration of the game board 14 attached to the inner frame 12. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided in the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 13 is made of a wooden base plate 50 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, and a general winning opening. 3, the start winning opening 4, the variable winning device 5, the through gate 7, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, the variable winning device 5, the through gate 7, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 50 by router processing, and from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14a (see FIG. 1) of the door frame 14.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and a glass unit (not shown) disposed on the back side of the door frame 14. A game area where a game is played is formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided for guiding the ball fired from the ball launching unit 66 (see FIG. 3) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2). The return ball preventing member 68 reduces (closes) the exit of the ball guide passage 60 sandwiched between the two rails 61 and 62 in a normal state, and the ball is guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the upper part of the game board 13. In this case, the exit of the ball guide passage 60 is enlarged (opened) by the amount of movement of the ball. The ball guided by the ball guide passage 60 expands the return ball prevention member 68 by the amount of movement of the ball itself and moves to the upper part of the game board 13.

  On the other hand, the return ball prevention member 68 is configured to maintain a state in which the exit of the ball guide passage 60 is reduced (closed) when the ball tries to move from the upper part of the game board 13 to the ball path 60. Yes. Thereby, the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage 60 again can be prevented.

  The return ball prevention member 68 is provided with a game ball detection switch 68a. The game ball detection switch 68 a is a switch that detects that a ball has been guided from the ball guide path 60 to the upper part of the game board 13. The game ball detection switch 68a detects that the exit of the ball guide passage 60 is expanded (opened) by the momentum of the ball when the ball is guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the upper part of the game board 13. Then, it is detected that the ball is guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the upper part of the game board 13. By counting the number of balls detected by the game ball detection switch 68a, the number of balls used in the game (the number of game balls) can be counted. The game ball detection switch 68a may have any configuration as long as it detects the passage of a ball guided from the ball guide passage 60 to the upper part of the game board 13.

  A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 50 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 87 provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) 87a which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 87b is disposed in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 4). ing. The first symbol display device 87 uses the LED 87a and the 7-segment indicator 87b to display the first symbol in accordance with each control performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9) described later. The gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly displayed by the display mode of the first symbol. The plurality of LEDs 87a display a change by indicating whether or not the change is made in accordance with a ball entering the start winning opening 4 (start win) by a lighting state, or as a stop pattern after the end of the change, A symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is indicated by a lighting state, or the number of balls that have not been executed among the balls that have entered the starting prize opening 4 (holding balls) is on hold. The number of balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 87b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 87a are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. .

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the entrance to the start winning opening 4, whether or not a big hit is determined, and if the big hit is determined, the type of the big hit is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and short-time jackpot are prepared. The LED 87a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of two rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Also, “time-saving big hit” is a big hit that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a big hit of 15 rounds and is in a short-time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. In the high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment, the winning probability of a second symbol (ordinary symbol), which will be described later, is increased, and the electric combination associated with the starting winning port 4 is easily released, so This includes a game state in which a ball can easily enter the mouth 4.

  On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short-time state (mid-time) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is increased, It means a state of a game in which a ball easily enters the start winning opening 4 because the electric accessory attached to the starting winning opening 4 is easily opened.

  Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, the electric power associated with the start winning opening 4 is opened according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, or the electric power is applied once per symbol in the second symbol. It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an accessory opens. For example, the short time state or the high probability state in the low probability state may be a state in which the opening time of the electric accessory attached to the start winning opening 4 is longer than in other game states. Moreover, the short time state and the high probability state in the low probability state may be a state in which the number of times that the electric accessory is released per hit in the second symbol is larger than in other game states.

  In the game area, a plurality of (four in FIG. 4) general winning openings 3 are arranged through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. When a ball wins the general winning opening 3, a general winning switch 44 (see FIG. 7) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. As a result of turning on the general winning switch 44, It is paid out as a prize ball. Since this pachinko machine 10 is an in-flight circulation pachinko machine, five balls are not actually paid out to the player, but the number of possessed balls of the player counted inside the pachinko machine 10 The value for 5 balls is added.

  A variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, a liquid crystal display that performs a variable display of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display device 87, triggered by a ball entering the start winning opening 4 (start winning prize) to be described later. (Hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), a third symbol display device 81, and a second symbol (ordinary symbol) LED that is variably displayed with the passage of the ball of the through gate 7 as a trigger. 2 symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 9) to be described later, for example, left, middle and right The three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol sequence, and a variable display (variable effect) in which the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is provided. To be done. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 87, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 87 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as described above, and is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. FIG. 5 schematically shows the display screen area division setting and the effective line setting together.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) described later is a big hit, a variation effect in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuating effects are over. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot ends, a variation effect is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) with odd numbers added are arranged. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the jackpot is finished, a fluctuating effect is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three areas. One is a variable display area Dm, one is an effect display area Db, and the other is a hold display area Ds.

  The variation display area Dm is an area where a variation effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed is displayed. The variable display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the variable display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Accordingly, a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 stages are displayed in the variable display area Dm.

  Here, the middle part of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set as an effective line L1, and in each game (variation effect), the effective lines are in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. The third symbol is stopped and displayed on L1. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in the present embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot effect is performed.

  The effect display area Db displays characters, character information, etc. on the back side of the third pattern, displays a notice effect while the change effect is being performed in the change display area Dm, It is an area where various effect images are displayed.

  Here, the notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the current fluctuating effect, so that the player can know the degree of expectation that will be a big hit according to the content of the image displayed in the notice effect It has become. The player can increase the expectation that is a big hit by viewing the notice effect displayed during the change effect.

  The pachinko machine 10 is prepared from a variation effect with a short variation time to a variation effect with a long variation time, and the notice effect is configured to be executed more as the variation effect has a longer variation time. This is because if the variation time of the variation effect is long, the player may be bored until it is stopped and displayed, and the player is executed every time the announcement effect is displayed. Can have a sense of expectation for jackpots. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the player and continue playing the game.

  The hold display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not been executed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the start winning opening 4. When a ball enters the start winning opening 4 while the variable display is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (1st symbol display device 87), the number of times the ball enters is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 87 and also in the reserved display area Ds.

  In the holding display area Ds, one holding ball number symbol is displayed for each holding ball number, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the number of the displayed holding ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the hold display area Ds, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls Indicates four balls. Moreover, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the holding display area Ds, it indicates that the number of held balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The player can grasp the number of held balls that are held at that time from the number of held balls displayed in the held display area Ds.

  Instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is different from a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a mode (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 87, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, or the door frame 12 and the like are provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls. May be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 4, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the through gate 7. is there. In the second symbol display device 83, when the result of the lottery performed along with the passage of the through gate 7 is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the change display. If the result of the lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed after the variable display.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol “◯”, the electric accessory associated with the start winning opening 4 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Has been. The number of passes of the ball through the through gate 7 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 87 and also on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 87 or the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the pass through the through gate 7 is not limited to the maximum number of balls to be held, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 87, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a start winning opening 4 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the start prize opening 4 (start prize), a start prize switch 45 (see FIG. 7) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the start prize switch 45 is turned on, The main controller 110 makes a lottery lottery, and starts (starts) a fluctuating effect in the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81. Then, after the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the variation effect is stopped, the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 87a of the first symbol display device 87, and the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as the third symbol display. The display is stopped on the active line L1 of the device 81 (variable display area Dm). The start winning opening 4 is one of the winning openings, and when a ball enters, five balls are paid out as winning balls. Since this pachinko machine 10 is an in-flight circulation pachinko machine, five balls are not actually paid out to the player, but the number of possessed balls of the player counted inside the pachinko machine 10 The value for 5 balls is added.

  When a ball enters the start winning opening 4 while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 87), the ball is held up to four times at maximum. The variation effect corresponding to the suspended ball (reserved ball) is performed after the end of the variation effect corresponding to the retained ball that has been reserved before. As described above, the number of held balls that are held (the number of held balls) is indicated by the first symbol display device 87 and also in the hold display area Ds.

  In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the ball entering the start winning opening 4 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more.

  A variable winning device 5 is disposed below the start winning port 4, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large open port) 5a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. When a ball wins the specific winning opening 5a, a specific winning switch 46 (see FIG. 7) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the specific winning switch 46, 15 balls are turned on. It is paid out as a prize ball. Since the pachinko machine 10 is an in-flight circulation pachinko machine, 15 balls are not actually paid out to the player, but the number of possessed balls of the player counted inside the pachinko machine 10 The value for 15 balls is added.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 87a of the first symbol display device 87 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 5a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 5a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 5a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 5a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable prize-winning device 5 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 5a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open and close the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 5a is normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downwards in the front to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 5a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 5a, and the LED 87a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 87, the specific winning opening 5a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 5a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 5a while the opening 5a is open You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhering space K1, The small window 47 (see FIG. 2) and the small window 37 (see FIG. 1) of the door frame 14 can be visually recognized.

  Further, an out port 6 is provided below the game board 13. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 3, 4, 5 a are discharged to the back surface of the game board 13 through the out opening 6. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30.

  First, an overall outline of the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. Various control boards are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 (actually the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30) so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally, or stacked in front and back. A back pack 302 or the like constituted by a protective cover made of metal is attached. In the present embodiment, various control boards are divided and mounted on two mounting bases to form two control board units 300 and 301, and these control board units 300 and 301 are individually attached to the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 13. I am trying to put it on.

  The control board unit 300 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 301 is unitized by mounting a counting board (counting device 111), a firing control board (launching control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card sand device connection board 116.

  Each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a clock used for time counting and synchronization. A pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the counting device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card sand device connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (counting device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (by caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The counting device 111 is provided with an error release button 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. For example, when the counting device 111 determines that there is a possibility that trouble or cheating has occurred, the error release button 120 notifies the counting device 111 that the trouble or cheating has been resolved. Operated to notify. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the back surface configuration of the inner frame 12 and the game board 13 will be described. The game board 13 is installed in a square frame-shaped installation area surrounded by the resin base 40 and is fixed by a plurality of locking fixtures provided on the inner frame 12 so as not to drop off.

  A variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the center of the game board 13. In the variable display unit 80, a resin (for example, ABS) frame cover 88 that covers the center frame 86 (see FIG. 4) from the back is provided so as to protrude rearward, and at the rear end of the frame cover 88, An LCD 81 as a liquid crystal display device and a display control device 114 are detachably attached in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. In the frame cover 88, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 86 are disposed.

  A back frame set 41 is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 so as to surround the variable display device unit 80. The back frame set 41 is a thin resin-molded product (for example, made of ABS) provided so as to stick to the back surface of the game board 13, and a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning openings Is formed. In detail, below the back frame set 41, it corresponds to the opening portion of the game board 13 of the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5 a (refer to FIG. 4 respectively), and 1 on the downstream side A collection passage 41a is formed that gathers at the place.

  The collection passage 41 a is provided with a discharge port 41 b for discharging the sphere to a discharge passage 42 a provided in the discharge passage board 42 at a position where the collection passage 41 a gathers at one location on the downstream side. The balls collected from the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a by the collecting passage 41a and gathered in one place on the downstream side are the outlets provided in the collecting passage 41a at the place where the balls gather. 41b is discharged into the discharge passage 42a of the ball discharge passage board 42.

  The ball discharge passage board 42 is a resin molded product (for example, made of polycarbonate resin) attached below the game board 13. The discharge passage 42 a is a passage for guiding the discharge ball to the end portion 65 a (see FIG. 3A) of the supply passage 65 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12. Is formed.

  Accordingly, as illustrated by the phantom line in FIG. 7, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 3 and the like gather through the collection passage 41a of the back frame set 41 and pass through the discharge opening 41b. After being discharged to the discharge passage 42a of 42, it is discharged to the supply passage 65 through the discharge passage 42a. In addition, the ball that has entered the out port 6 is directly discharged to the discharge passage 42a, and the ball that has not won any winning opening is also discharged to the supply passage 65 through the discharge passage 42a.

  In the above configuration, with the lower end surface of the game board 13 as a boundary, a back frame set 41 (collection passage 41a) is provided above, and a discharge passage board 42 (discharge passage 42a) is provided below. The game board 13 is provided without overlapping (overlapping) in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the game board 13 is removed from the inner frame 12, there is no inconvenience that the discharge passage board 42 prevents the game board 13 from being removed.

  On the back surface of the game board 30, there is provided a winning detection mechanism for detecting the passage of the game ball to various winning holes and the like. Specifically, a general winning switch 44 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning slot 3 on the front side of the game board 13, and a starting winning switch 45 is provided at a position corresponding to the starting winning slot 4, and the specific winning slot 5a. Is provided with a specific winning switch 46.

  The general winning switch 44 is connected to a board surface relay board (not shown) through electric wiring, and this board surface relay board (not shown) is further connected to a main controller 110 described later. The specific winning switch 46 is connected to a specific winning opening relay board (not shown), and this specific winning opening relay board (not shown) is also connected to the main controller 110. On the other hand, the start winning switch 45 is directly connected to the main controller 110 without going through the relay board.

  When the general winning switch 44 senses a winning of a ball at the general winning opening 3, the general winning switch 44 which is normally turned off is turned on. As a result, five prize balls are determined by the main control device 110, and a possessed ball addition command for notifying that the possessed ball is increased by 5 is transmitted to the counting device 111.

  When a winning of a ball at the start winning opening 4 is detected by the start winning switch 45, the start winning switch 45 which is normally turned off is turned on. As a result, the main control device 110 makes a big winning lottery, and starts (starts) a variable effect in the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81. Further, the main control device 110 determines five prize balls, and a possessed ball addition command for notifying that the possessed balls increase by 5 is transmitted to the counting device 111.

  When the winning of a ball at the specific winning opening 5a is detected by the specific winning switch 46, the specific winning switch 46 which is normally turned off is turned on. As a result, 15 prize balls are determined by the main control device 110, and a possessed ball addition command for notifying that the possessed ball is increased by 15 is transmitted to the counting device 111.

  Although the details will be described later, the number of balls possessed by the player is counted by the counting device 111. When the counting device 111 receives the possessed ball addition command from the main control device 110, it is indicated by the received possessed ball addition command. A value corresponding to the number of balls is added to the number of balls held. Thereby, in the in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10, a prize ball is given as a player's possession ball.

  On the back side of the game board 30, a winning ball detection switch 47 for detecting a winning ball that passes through the discharge port 41b and is discharged to the discharge passage 42a is located at a position of a discharge port 41b provided in the collection passage 41a. An out ball detection switch 48 is provided at the position of the out port 6 to detect a ball discharged from the out port 6 to the discharge passage 42a. Both the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 normally output an off signal, and output an on signal when the ball passes the position where each detection switch is provided. Both the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 are connected to a counting relay board (not shown), and this counting relay board (not shown) is connected to the counting device 111.

  As described above, the ball that passes through the discharge port 41b and is discharged to the discharge passage 42a is a winning ball that has won a prize in any of the various winning ports (the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, or the specific winning port 5a). . Therefore, all the winning prizes detected in the winning ball detection switch 47 provided at the position of the discharge port 41b (the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a) are all won. Become a sphere. Accordingly, the winning ball detection switch 47 is connected to the counting device 111 via the counting relay board, so that the counting device 111 can count the number of winning balls won in various winning ports.

  Further, the balls that pass through the out port 6 and are discharged to the discharge passage 42a are balls that have not won any of the winning ports 3, 4, 5a. Therefore, all the balls guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 did not win the various winning openings detected by the out ball detection switch 48 provided at the position of the out port 6. Become a sphere. Accordingly, by connecting the out port 6 to the counting device 111 via the counting relay board, the counting device 111 wins various winning ports among the balls guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13. It is possible to count the number of missing balls.

  On the back surface of the inner frame 12, a locking device 20 is disposed in a vertically long manner at the left end in rear view (right end in front view of the pachinko machine 10). The locking device 20 is a device for locking the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and locking the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12.

  A cylinder lock 21 a is provided at the lower center of the locking device 20 as viewed from the front. The cylinder lock 21 a is provided so as to protrude from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and has a keyhole 21 b (see FIG. 1) on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. When a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole 21b and the inserted key is turned leftward in the front view (rightward in the rear view), the locking of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is unlocked. Moreover, when the key inserted in the keyhole 21b is turned rightward in the front view (leftward in the rear view), the door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 12.

  The locking device 20 includes an inner frame locking unit that locks the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, and an electronic lock 99 that locks the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. The inner frame locking unit includes an eaves base 21e formed in a vertically long shape, and a eaves member 21f that is slidably provided on the eaves base 21e and engages with the outer frame 11. The eaves base 21e is formed in a substantially L-shaped cross section by an attachment plate 21e1 having a plurality of attachment holes and a support plate 21e2 orthogonal to the attachment plate 21e1 and supporting the eaves member 21f. The locking device 20 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by tightening a mounting plate 21e1 of the flange base 21e with a screw at an end portion (left end portion in rear view) on the back surface side of the inner frame 12 and away from the opening / closing axis.

  Inside the support plate 21e2 of the rod base 21e, a plate-like slide rod 21d formed vertically along the support plate 21e2 is disposed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. Further, two upper and lower portions of the flange base 21e are provided with flange members (inner frame flange members) 21f that are slidably supported by the support plate 21e2 while being always pulled upward by a coil spring (not shown). Yes. The inner frame collar member 21f is formed in a bowl shape with the tip portion protruding upward, and is hooked on a metal fitting (not shown) provided on the outer frame 11 to lock the inner frame 12. The inner frame collar member 21f engages with the sliding collar 21d and slides downward only when the sliding collar 21d moves downward from the neutral position. The sliding rod 21d is urged upward by a reaction force having substantially the same magnitude as the pulling force of the coil spring that urges the inner frame flange member 21f.

  The two upper and lower inner frame collar members 21f are independently movable downward. When the inner frame collar member 21f is moved and unlocked with a wire or the like, both inner frames The scissor member 21f must be moved downward. Even if only one of them is moved downward, the other inner frame flange member 21f remains hooked on a metal fitting (not shown) of the outer frame 11. For this reason, an unauthorized unlocking operation becomes difficult and crime prevention is improved. The inner frame collar member 21f moves downward as the sliding collar 21d slides downward. The sliding rod 21d is slid downward in conjunction with an operation of turning counterclockwise (clockwise in rear view) with a dedicated key to the cylinder lock 21a. The inner frame 12 is operated by operating the dedicated key. Can be unlocked.

  Here, the interlocking mechanism between the cylinder lock 21a and the sliding rod 21d will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8A is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the cylinder lock 21a, the sliding rod 21d, and a photo sensor 95 described later when the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated by the dedicated key. ) Is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the cylinder lock 21a, the sliding rod 21d, and the photosensor 95 in a state where the cylinder lock 21a is rotated counterclockwise (clockwise in the rear view) by a dedicated key. FIG. 8C shows the positional relationship between the cylinder lock 21a, the sliding rod 21d, and the photosensor 95 in a state where the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise by the dedicated key (clockwise when viewed from the back). FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (a), a cam plate 21c having a protrusion that enters a notch (not shown) of the sliding rod 21d is attached to the lock shaft of the cylinder lock 21a. When the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated (FIG. 8 (a)) or when rotated clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in rear view) (FIG. 8 (c)), the protrusion of the cam plate 21c slides. The sliding rod 21d is disengaged from the notch of the moving rod 21d, and the sliding rod 21d is biased upward by a coil spring. As a result, the inner frame collar member 21f is also maintained in the state of being pulled upward by the coil spring, so that the inner frame collar member 21f is hooked by a receiving metal fitting (not shown) provided on the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11.

  On the other hand, when the dedicated key is inserted into the key hole 21b (see FIG. 1) of the cylinder lock 21a and rotated counterclockwise in the front view (clockwise in the rear view, clockwise in FIG. 8B), FIG. As shown in (b), the projection of the cam plate 21c enters the notch of the sliding rod 21d and pushes down the sliding rod 21d. In this way, by sliding the sliding rod 21d downward by the rotation operation of the dedicated key, the inner frame flange member 21f interlocked with the sliding rod 21d is operated, and the inner frame 12 is moved relative to the outer frame 11. The locked state can be released.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8A, a photo sensor 95 is attached to the attachment plate 21e1 of the saddle base 21e on the upper side of the cylinder lock 21a. Here, a schematic configuration of the photosensor 95 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8D is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of the photosensor 95.

  The photosensor 95 includes a light emitting element attachment portion 95a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached, a light receiving element attachment portion 95b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is attached, one end of the light emitting element attachment portion 95a, and light reception. A U-shaped sensor configured by a connecting portion 95c that connects one end of the element mounting portion 95b so that the light emitting element and the light receiving element are opposed to each other by a predetermined distance, and the light emitting element mounting portion A detection groove 95d is formed by 95a, the light receiving element mounting portion 95b, and the connecting portion 95c.

  When there is no insert in the detection groove 95d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attaching portion 95a is received as it is by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attaching portion 95b. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 95d, light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element attaching portion 95a is blocked, and the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element attaching portion 95b receives the light. Can not. The photo sensor 95 outputs whether or not light is received by the light receiving element as a signal, so that the control device that has received the signal can determine whether or not any insert has been inserted into the detection groove 95d.

  In the photosensor 95, the light emitting element mounting portion 95a is disposed on the front side in the rear view (rear side in the front view), the light receiving element mounting portion 95b is disposed in the rear side in the rear view (front side in the front view), and the connecting portion 95c is disposed on the upper side in the rear view. When the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in the front view (counterclockwise in the back view), the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is inserted by inserting the cam plate 21c of the cylinder lock 21a into the detection groove 95d. Is attached to the attachment plate 21e1 of the saddle base 21e.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 8A to 8C again, the relationship between the rotation operation of the cylinder lock 21a and the detection state of the photosensor 95 will be described. When the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated (FIG. 8 (a)) or when it is rotated counterclockwise (clockwise when viewed from the back) (FIG. 8 (b)), it is attached to the cylinder lock 21a. The cam plate 21c is out of the detection groove 95d of the photosensor 95, and light emitted from the light emitting element of the photosensor 95 is received by the light receiving element.

  On the other hand, when the dedicated key is inserted into the key hole 21b (see FIG. 1) of the cylinder lock 21a and rotated clockwise in the front view (counterclockwise in the rear view, counterclockwise in FIG. 8C), As shown in FIG. 8 (c), the cam plate 21c attached to the cylinder lock 21a is inserted into the light receiving groove 95d of the photosensor 95. Thereby, in the photo sensor 95, the light emitted from the light emitting element toward the light receiving element is blocked by the cam plate 21c, and therefore the light emitted from the light emitting element cannot be received by the light receiving element.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the detection result of the photo sensor 95 (whether or not light is received by the light receiving element) is output to the counting device 111. Based on the detection result of the photosensor 95, the counting device 111 determines whether or not the cylinder lock 21a has been rotated clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in rear view). When it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (leftward in rear view), the counting device 111 operates the electronic lock 99 attached to the inner frame 12 to operate the door frame with respect to the inner frame 12. It is comprised so that 14 locking may be unlocked.

  Here, with reference to FIG.8 (e), the structure of the electronic lock 99 and the locking mechanism of the door frame 14 by the electronic lock 99 are demonstrated. FIG. 8E is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line VIIIe-VIIIe in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the electronic lock 99 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by being attached to the mounting plate 21 e 1 of the heel base 21 e at the upper right end of the back view. The electronic lock 99 includes an engagement rod 99a and a solenoid 99b that expands and contracts the engagement rod 99a in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 10. The solenoid 99b is driven by the counting device 111. When a voltage is applied to the solenoid 99b by the driving of the counting device 111, the solenoid 99b pulls up the engagement rod 99a and contracts. Further, in a state where no voltage is applied to the solenoid 99b, the solenoid 99b pulls the engagement rod 99a and keeps it extended. Note that the state shown in FIG. 8E is a state where the engagement rod 99a is extended.

  A reinforcing iron plate 96 for increasing the strength of the door frame 14 is connected to the door frame 14 via a plurality of ribs 97 at the right end (VIIIe-VIIIe line portion in FIG. 1) of the door frame 14 when viewed from the front. The reinforcing iron plate 96 is provided with a protruding portion 96a. When the door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the projecting portion 96 a is inserted into the insertion hole 48 (see FIG. 2) provided in the inner frame 12, and on the back side of the inner frame 12. Protruding. An engaging hole 96b is provided in a portion of the protruding portion 96a that protrudes to the back side of the inner frame 12, and normally, an engaging rod 99a in which the electronic lock 99 is extended is provided in the engaging hole 96b. Inserted. Thereby, since the engaging rod 99a of the electronic lock 99 provided on the inner frame 12 is engaged with the protruding portion 96a of the door frame 14 in a normal state, the door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12. The

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (leftward in rear view), the counting device 111 applies a voltage to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, so that the engagement rod 99a is moved by the solenoid 99b. The engagement rod 99a is removed from the engagement hole 96b. As a result, the engagement state between the protruding portion 96a of the door frame 14 and the engaging rod 99a of the electronic lock 99 provided on the inner frame 12 is released, so that the protruding portion 96a can be extracted from the insertion hole 48. Thus, the door frame 14 can be opened from the inner frame 12. That is, the locking of the door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 can be unlocked.

  The door frame 14 is locked by the electronic lock 99 for the following reason. In the in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10, as described above, the ball is circulated inside the pachinko machine 10 to prevent the player from touching the ball. On the other hand, some unfair acts such as exchanging a ball or oiling the ball to change the movement of the ball in the game area cannot be performed.

  Here, if the door frame 14 is unlocked immediately when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is rotated clockwise as in the conventional game, the game board is opened when the door frame 14 is opened. There is a high possibility that the sphere is flowing down the front region of 13, and the cheating person who unlocked the door frame 14 to perform cheating can easily touch the sphere. Therefore, a fraudster may easily perform a fraud such as extracting a ball flowing down the front area of the game board 13 and replacing it with a fraudulent ball or oiling the ball. There is.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, since the lock of the door frame 14 is locked by the electronic lock 99, the unlocking can be controlled electronically. Specifically, when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned clockwise during the game, the counting device 111 stops the ball firing in the ball launching unit 66, and the ball fired before the stop is played. The solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99 is driven after a sufficient time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds after the ball has stopped firing) to flow down the front area of the board 13 and be collected again in the supply passage 65. Thus, the engagement state between the engagement rod 99 of the electronic lock 99 and the protruding portion 96a of the door frame 14 can be released, and the door frame 14 can be unlocked. Thereby, even if the unlocking of the door frame 14 is instructed by inserting the key into the keyhole 21b and turning it rightward during the game, the ball fired during the game is in front of the game board 13. During the flow down, at least the door frame 14 can be kept closed. Therefore, when the door frame 14 is opened, the ball can be stored in the supply passage 65 covered with the cover, so that the player can not touch the ball built in the pachinko machine 14, It is possible to prevent cheating.

  Further, since the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99 keeps the engaging rod 99a pulled out and extended unless a voltage is applied, the door frame 14 cannot be unlocked while the power is off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the door frame 14 from being opened in a state where the power source is off, such as outside business hours, so that illegal balls are mixed in or that the game board 13 is subjected to some work.

  On the back side of the inner frame 12, as shown in FIG. 8E, a photo sensor 98 is disposed on the extended line in the protruding direction of the protruding portion 96 a of the door frame 14 so as to surround the tip end portion of the protruding portion 96 a. It is attached. The photosensor 98 has the same configuration as the photosensor 95 shown in FIG. 8D, and as shown in FIG. 8E, a light emitting element mounting portion to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached. 98a, a light receiving element mounting portion 98b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is mounted, one end of the light emitting element mounting portion 98a and one end of the light receiving element mounting portion 98b are separated from each other by a predetermined distance. The U-shaped sensor is constituted by a connecting portion 98c that is connected so as to be opposed to each other. Further, in the photosensor 98, a detection groove 98d is formed by the light emitting element attaching portion 98a, the light receiving element attaching portion 98b, and the connecting portion 98c.

  The photo sensor 98 is configured such that the light emitting element mounting portion 98a is disposed on the upper side in the front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 98b is disposed on the lower side in the front view, and the connecting portion 98c is disposed on the rear side in the front view. The projections 96a are attached to the inner frame 12 so that the light emitted from the light emitting element toward the light receiving element is blocked by inserting the tip ends of the fourteen projecting parts 96a into the detection groove 98d.

  Thereby, when the door frame 14 is in a closed state, the light emitted from the light emitting element toward the light receiving element is blocked by the protruding portion 96a of the door frame 14 in the photosensor 98. Irradiated light cannot be received by the light receiving element. On the other hand, when the door frame 14 is in an open state, the protruding portion 96a is extracted from the inner frame 12, so that the protruding portion 96a is removed from the detection groove 98d of the photosensor 98. Therefore, in this case, the light emitted from the light emitting element of the photosensor 95 is received by the light receiving element.

  When the detection result of the photo sensor 98 changes from a signal indicating the open state of the door frame 14 to a signal indicating the closed state, the electronic lock 99 stops applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 99b, and 99a is stretched. Thereby, the engaging rod 99a can be engaged with the protrusion part 96a of the door frame 14, and the door frame 14 can be locked. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 14 is closed, the electronic lock 99 automatically stops applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 99b, and the door frame 14 is locked. When 14 is closed, the counting means 111 may be controlled to stop applying the voltage applied to the solenoid 99b.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the detection result of the photosensor 98 (whether or not light is received by the light receiving element) is output to the counting device 111. Thereby, the counting device 111 can grasp the open / closed state of the door frame 14 based on the detection result of the photosensor 98.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, and a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and various data temporarily when executing the control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, the RAM 203 is a memory for storing, and in addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the counting device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. The command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In the main controller 110, the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, and determination of a winning ball in accordance with winning a prize. Perform the main processing. The ROM 202 stores fixed value data used for controlling these processes. For example, a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a release variation pattern table 202d are stored in the ROM 222. The RAM 203 controls main processes of the pachinko machine 10 (big hit lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83, etc.). Various counters are provided for this purpose.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  The jackpot lottery and display settings of the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 include a first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol. The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), or at intervals of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 20), for example. Further, some counters are updated irregularly even in the main process (see FIG. 20). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203a is an area for storing the updated value of each counter. The MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203a at the counter update timing for each counter. Update the counter.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). The holding area temporarily stores the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203a in accordance with the timing of entering the start winning opening 4. This is an area for storing (holding) automatically. In addition, the execution area stores a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 that are used to determine a variation pattern and stop type of jackpot lottery and variation effects at the start timing of variation. It is an area to do.

  When the MPU 201 detects a ball entering the start winning opening 4 (start win), each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203a at that time is detected. , It is stored in one area of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no reservation in the reserved area and all of the reserved first to fourth areas are empty areas, the value of each counter is stored in the reserved first area. When there is only one hold in the hold area and each counter value is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. When there are two holds in the holding area and the values of the counters are stored only in the holding first and second areas, the values of the counters are stored in the holding third area. When there are three holds in the holding area and the values of the counters are stored only in the holding first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the holding fourth area. Thereby, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer 203a at the timing of the start winning prize is stored in the hold first area, the hold second area, the hold third area, and the hold fourth area in the order of the start winning prize. Can do. If a start winning is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the holding first to fourth areas, the value of each counter at that time is not held but discarded. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to four start winnings.

  Further, when the start timing of the variable effect is reached, the MPU 201 moves each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved first area to the execution area. Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the big hit lottery, the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol are determined.

  Further, after the values of the counters in the holding first area are moved to the execution area, the values of the counters stored in the holding second area are shifted to the empty holding first area and stored in the holding third area. Each counter value is shifted to the reserved second area, and the counter value stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. Thereby, when the fluctuating effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203b, the holding is reduced by one and one area of the holding area is released.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first per-random number counter C1 is a counter for use in the jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment). The update of the first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reaches the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). This is done by returning to 0 later. Further, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returned to the initial value in the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1. For example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured by a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) is executed, but is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 20).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203a is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the start winning opening 4. Then, at the start of the fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a big random number value (big hit random value, also referred to as a win value). Make a lottery. The value of the random number for winning the jackpot (the jackpot random value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the reserved ball storage area 203b (execution of the reserved ball storage area 203b). When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in (area) matches the jackpot random number set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is won.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a shows the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 (jackpot random number value) determined to be a jackpot. The jackpot random number table 202a includes a jackpot random number value that is referred to when the gaming state is in a low probability state (that is, a period in which the probability change is not in progress) and a jackpot random number value that is referred to in a gaming state in which the gaming state is in a high probability state (that is, that the probability change is in progress). The number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. Further, the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values “7, 307, 582” are associated with the “low probability state” and stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. . On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that are jackpots in the high probability state is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are associated with the“ high probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. Stored.

  When the MPU 201 makes a jackpot determination, the MPU 201 reads a jackpot random number value suitable for the gaming state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a. Then, the MPU 201 determines that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b) used for the jackpot determination is read from the jackpot random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of them.

  In other words, when the gaming state is in a low probability state, a big hit occurs when the value of the first per-random number counter C1 matches any one of “7, 307, 582”. Since the first hit random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the big hit probability in the low probability state is 1/300. If the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”is a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state are not duplicated. A jackpot random value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description of various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the start winning opening 4 (start winning). Along with the hit random number counter C 1, it is stored in any one of the holding areas 1 to 4 in the holding ball storage area 203 b of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect In addition, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those for the big hit. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 11B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after hitting 15 rounds of jackpots. There is a “15R normal jackpot” that becomes a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and a “2R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 11A, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, and the value “40˜ 79 ”is associated, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability variable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “ If “15R normal jackpot” is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of jackpot, the 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table 202b.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines a stop symbol type (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) when the stop pattern is lost. For example, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( That is, after reaching 99), it returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop pattern at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3. As the stop type selected in the present embodiment, after the occurrence of reach, the final stop symbol is the “stop out of front / rear reach” in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. There are three stop (production) patterns: “reach other than front / rear detachment” that stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and “complete disengagement” where no reach occurs.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process), and the held ball in the RAM 203 is timing when the ball wins the start winning opening 4 (start winning). It is stored in one of the reserved areas among the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the storage area 203b. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the stop type in the variable effect Is the one at the time of detachment. In this case, the stop type at that time is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the range of random number values to be selected for the stop type is different. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easy to select “completely off”. This table has a narrow range of random numbers corresponding to “rear out of front / rear out” and “reach out of front / rear out of front” and “rear out of front / rear out of front” and “reach out of front / rear out of front”. It becomes difficult to select “reach out of reach” or “reach other than out of front / rear”.

  If the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random values from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely out” is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the start winning opening 4; It becomes difficult to select “completely off”. In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front / rear deviation” is as wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than front / rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, a lot of reach display with a long production time can be performed, so that it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the start winning opening 4 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continuously performed. It becomes easy. In the latter table as well, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining a variation pattern. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and reaches 0 to the maximum value (that is, 198). Yes. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 20).

  The MPU 201 refers to the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the variation pattern table stored in the ROM 202 at the start of variation, and the variation pattern to be executed in the variation type counter CS1 variation effect. To decide. The variation pattern determined here is a variation time of symbol variation.

  That is, main controller 110 determines only the variation time of the symbol variation as the variation pattern. On the other hand, a specific variation mode is set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can display the third pattern from among the variation modes in which variation display is possible with the variation time. The details of the variation pattern of the third symbol displayed on the display device 81 are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. At the same time, the lamps of the lamp display device 227 (lighting units 32 to 36) are turned on and blinked.

  As described above, the main control device 110 determines only the variation time as the processing for determining the variation pattern, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 provide details of the variation mode according to the variation time. decide. The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. However, when determining the variation pattern, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the variation time. Compared with the case where the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the variation pattern determination processing of the main control device 110 can be easily performed. Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main control device 110, detailed information on the determined variation mode must be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the like, and the command necessary for the notification is, for example, 3 There is a risk that it may have to be composed of bytes or more, and command transmission and reception may be complicated. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the variation time. Therefore, if only the information regarding the determined variation time is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 or the like. In many cases, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complication of command transmission / reception. Even if only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined in the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the fluctuation mode according to the specified fluctuation time from among the many fluctuation modes. In addition, since it is configured to perform variable display on the third symbol display device 81 in the determined variation mode, various variation effects can be given to the player, and the player's interest is improved. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the big hit variation pattern table 202c used at the time of big hit and the variation pattern table 202c used at the time of deviation are used. A deviation variation pattern table 202d is prepared. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for detachment, the variation pattern for detachment (probability variation) depending on whether the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a normal low-probability state excluding the time-short state. A table 202d2 and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 are prepared.

  Here, with reference to FIG.11 (c)-(e), the detail of various variation patterns is demonstrated. First, FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big hit variation pattern table 202 c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 11C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, the jackpot type is classified into 15R jackpot common to be referred when the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, and dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot referred to when it is 2R probability variation jackpot. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each divided group.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a big hit random number value at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is set. Accordingly, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is determined from the jackpot variation table 202c.

  In common with 15R jackpots, there are fluctuation patterns of fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. Associating these fluctuations A and B with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation A is 0 to 39 and the fluctuation B is 40 to 198.

  When the variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in a normal reach manner under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When the variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in a super reach manner under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

  Norreach is a reach with a short variation time, and is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach. The super reach is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after reaching for a variation time longer than that of the normal reach (for example, a reach developed from the long reach or the normal reach). Since a table common to 15R jackpots is selected in the case of 15R probability variable jackpots or 15R normal jackpots, super reach is easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring so that the normal reach is also selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any reach.

  Note that there are many normal reach and super reach executed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, which have different contents of production even in the same variation time. For example, in addition to a normal reach where no character is displayed, when two symbols on the active line L1 become the same symbol and reach a reach state, or at other timing, a predetermined character or character information is once or plural times Reach is provided to display the times and perform a notice effect. Various characters are displayed in this case. In addition, there are multiple reach types with different contents, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly, a reach that adds a notice effect before the start of change, and a reach that adds a big hit due to re-change. ing. Thereby, various variation effects can be executed and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  Next, the variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is only the 2R variation with a variation time of 31 seconds, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R fluctuation (31 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When 2R variation (31 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, one mode is selected from among a plurality of prepared variation modes dedicated to 2R probability variation big hits under the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The variation effect is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot, for example, with the character of “chicken”, the variation pattern in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol, or “girl” that does not normally appear A variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol along with the character is included.

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, other variation type counters for finely adjusting the variation time in about ± several seconds may be provided, and whether or not a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or reach effect is added before or during the change effect This may be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 11D is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202 d 1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 11 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached. When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a big hit value (big hit random number value) at the start of the fluctuation, that is, when the value is out of the game state, the gaming state is excluded from the short time state In the normal low probability state, according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the fluctuation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area A pattern is determined from an outlier (normal) variation pattern.

  There are two types of variation patterns that are used only for complete deviation: variation D, in which variation ends in a short time of 7 seconds and reach is not established, and variation E is 10 seconds, which is a variation time longer than variation D but reach is not established. In association with the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 149, and the variation E (10 seconds) is 150 to 198. In addition, the reach common includes the above-described variation A (30 seconds) and variation B (60 seconds), and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 indicates that the variation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 0. 197, Fluctuation B (60 seconds) is 198.

  FIG. 11E is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 11E, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of separation, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. And a reach common reference when a reach other than front / rear out reach and a reach other than front / rear out are determined as stop types at the time of the come-off. Then, for each divided group, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected in each group. Note that the variation pattern selected when reference to complete out-going is referred to is variation D (7 seconds) and variation E (10 seconds), similar to the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1. Also, the variation patterns selected when the reach common is referred to are the variation A (30 seconds) and the variation B (60 seconds), similarly to the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d1.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the game, if the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. Determined from.

  In this deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for the variation D (7 seconds) and 191 to 198 for the variation E (10 seconds). It has become. Further, associating with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to reach, the variation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 197, and the variation B is 198.

  Since the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state during probability change, the ball easily enters the start winning opening 4. Therefore, if there are many changes E with a relatively long change time in the short-time state or the high-probability state, it takes time to start the next change display, giving the player a waiting state, May cause discomfort to the player. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable. Therefore, when the game state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change in the case of complete losing, the variation D having a shorter variation time than the variation E is present compared to the case where the gaming state is in the normal state excluding the time-short state. By configuring so that it can be easily selected and starting the next variable display at an early stage, the possibility of giving the player unpleasant feeling can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). In addition, when reach is established at the time of detachment, the number of the first symbol (or the third symbol) that stops last is shifted and stopped (for example, the front and back shifts that are shifted by one symbol). May be determined.

  Further, the selection of the detachment type is configured to be divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table 202d1 and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. However, even when the gaming state is normal, there are a plurality of holding balls. In the case of (for example, 3 or more if the maximum is 4), the change display may be terminated early, so that it may be selected with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Further, in the variation pattern tables for each deviation shown in FIGS. 11D and 11E, when the variation D and the variation E are simply excluded, and the deviation is selected, refer to other tables. The variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 10 again, various counters will be described. As described above, the second per-random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, the second random number counter C4 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 250 and reaches the maximum value (that is, 250). It is configured as a loop counter that returns to zero. In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and returned to the initial value in the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, when the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and the symbol “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed and the start winning opening 4 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 20).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big hit lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, in addition to the counter buffer 203a for storing various counters shown in FIG. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags and counters and I / O are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 28), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has the counting device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 87, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 5a as axes. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is provided with various winning switches 207 such as a general winning switch 44, a start winning switch 45, and a specific winning switch 46, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and the power supply device 115. A RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and a RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  For example, when the main controller 110 detects the presence / absence of a ball at the general winning opening 3 based on the detection result of the general winning switch 44, and detects the winning of the ball at the general winning opening 3, the main controller 110 Five prize balls are determined, and a possessed ball addition command for notifying that the possessed balls increase by 5 is transmitted to the counting device 111. Further, the main control device 110 detects the presence or absence of a ball at the start winning opening 4 based on the start winning switch 45. When the main control device 110 detects the winning of a ball at the start winning opening 4, the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery. Based on the result, the fluctuating effect in the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Further, five winning balls are determined, and a possessed ball addition command for notifying that the possessed ball is increased by 5 is transmitted to the counting device 111. Further, when the main controller 110 detects the presence / absence of a ball at the specific winning opening 5a based on the detection result of the specific winning switch 46, and detects the winning of a ball at the specific winning opening 5a, the main controller 110 15 winning balls are determined, and a possessed ball addition command for notifying that the possessed ball is increased by 15 is transmitted to the counting device 111.

  Details of the counting device 111 and the launch control device 112 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs light on and off in a lamp display device (lighting units 32 to 36, display lamp 31, etc.) 227, main control device 110. Based on the variation time indicated by the received variation pattern command, control is performed such as setting the variation mode of the variation effect to be executed in the variation time. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The ROM 222 stores one or more detailed variation patterns in association with each variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110. For example, with respect to the fluctuation A having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, a normal normal reach in which no character is displayed during the fluctuation time of 30 seconds and a normal reach that is displayed while the predetermined character is changing are associated with each other. Yes. In addition, a plurality of super reaches in which a predetermined character is displayed during a variation time of 60 seconds, a rear image is displayed with a rapid change, and the like are associated with variation B having a variation time of 60 seconds. ing. This super reach includes a variation pattern in which a notice effect is performed during one variation effect more than in the case of normal reach.

  When the MPU 221 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, the MPU 221 selects one detailed variation pattern from one or more detailed variation patterns associated with the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command. Determine the variation pattern. For example, when the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is variation A (variation time 30 seconds), normal normal reach in which no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds, and a predetermined character is displayed during variation. One detailed variation pattern is determined from the normal reach. Then, lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to a predetermined pattern with respect to the determined detailed variation pattern, and sound output from the sound output device 226 is controlled.

  In addition, when the MPU 221 determines a detailed variation pattern, the MPU 221 generates a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the type of the determined variation pattern, and the generated display variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes control for displaying a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a predetermined pattern with respect to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. For example, when the MPU 221 transmits a display variation pattern command indicating a normal normal reach in which no character is displayed during a variation time of 30 seconds as a detailed variation pattern type to the display control device 114, display control is performed. The device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation effect in a normal normal reach mode in which the character is not displayed for 30 seconds.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and the voice lamp control device 113 displays various screen displays such as a variation display (variation effect) and a jackpot effect of the third symbol. Control is performed according to a command transmitted from (main control device 111).

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and other various commands. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data (character information) for effects such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The video RAM 234 stores an area (not shown) in which a plurality of character information read from the character ROM 235 is decompressed in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the decompressed plural This is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data for one frame generated using at least part of the character information until the display is performed.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third data. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure and the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the counting device 111 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and also sends an initialization command to the counting device 111 to clear the backup data in the counting device 111. Send to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of the counting device 111 and the launch control device 112 that constitute the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The configuration will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the counting device 111, the firing control device 112, and the card sand device 70.

  The counting device 111 is provided in place of the conventional payout control device of the pachinko machine 10. The counting device 111 mainly performs the following three functions. First, the counting device 111 counts the number of possessed balls, which is the number of balls that the player can use for the game, and displays the number of possessed balls on the data display 24. Secondly, the counting device 111 counts the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 in order to circulate the balls in the pachinko machine 10 and use them in the game as the number of circulating balls. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 12, the counting device 111 checks whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is not changed based on the number of circulating spheres. Third, the counting device 111 allows the firing control device 112 to permit or stop the launch of the sphere. Hereinafter, the functions will be described in detail while explaining the detailed configuration of the counting device 111.

  The counting device 111 is mainly configured by an MPU 211 that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 211 includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like. Yes.

  Further, an input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the counting device 111 via a bus line 214 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. In addition to the main control device 110 and the launch control device 112 being connected to the input / output port 215, the 51 ball detection switch 91, the 50 ball detection switch 92, the ball feed detection switch 94, the game ball detection switch 68a, and the foul ball described above. Various ball detection switches such as a detection switch 93, an out ball detection switch 48, a winning ball detection switch 47, and a minimum number ball detection switch 90, a level meter 22, a data display 24, and a solenoid 99b of an electronic multiplier 99, etc. Mainly connected to each other.

  In the RAM 213 of the MPU 211, a possessed ball counter 213a, a possessed ball addition flag 213b, a circulating ball number memory 213c, an initial ball number memory 213d, a ball collection time counting counter 213e, a possessed ball addition command counter 213f, a winning ball counter 213g, a ball determination A flag 213h, an under state counter 213i, an over state counter 213j, and the like are mainly provided.

  The possessed ball counter 213a is a counter that counts the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game. The possessed ball counter 213a determines that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (in the case of S1756: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S1765 in FIG. 22 or S2003 in FIG. 25), which is executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2001: Yes in FIG. 25). “0” is set. That is, in this case, 0 is set as the number of possessed balls.

  Then, the possessed ball counter 213a is updated by the possessed ball number counting process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 211 every 1 millisecond, and a ball is lent to the player during the game, On the other hand, when it is determined that a winning ball has been played, the number of lent balls or the number of winning balls is added to the possessed ball counter 213a. When the MPU 211 receives a lending ball signal from the card sand device 70 (a signal for notifying the counting device 111 of the number of lending balls determined by the card sand device 70 when the lending button 74 is operated), It is determined that lending is performed, and the number of lent balls included in the rented ball signal is added to the possessed ball number counter 213a. Further, the MPU 211 breaks when a winning ball is played when a possessed ball addition command is received from the main controller 110, and adds the number of winning balls included in the possessed ball addition command to the possessed ball counter 213a.

  The possessed ball counter 213a is decremented by 1 when it is determined that the ball has been guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13. When the MPU 211 detects that the game ball detection switch 68a provided at the exit of the ball guide passage 60 is turned on, the MPU 211 determines that the ball is guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and the possession ball counter 213a. 1 is subtracted. Thus, by updating the possessed ball counter 213a, the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game can be counted.

  When the counting device 111 receives a settlement signal transmitted from the card sand device 70 to the counting device 111 when the return button 75 provided in the card sand device 70 is pressed, the MPU 211 In order to notify the card sand device 70 of the number of possessed balls, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a is notified to the card sand device 70. Then, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a is initialized to “0”. In the card sand device 70, the number of possessed balls received from the counting device 111 is converted into points at a predetermined exchange rate, and the converted points are cumulatively added to the saving data of the member card.

  The possessed ball addition flag 213b is a flag indicating that a possessed ball addition command has been received from the main controller 110 when it is on. The MPU 211 determines whether or not the possessed ball addition flag 213b is received from the main controller 110 depending on whether or not the possessed ball addition flag 213b is on. The number of prize balls shown is added to the possessed ball counter.

  The possessed ball addition flag 213b is determined when the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (in the case of S1756: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. In the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S1765 in FIG. 22 and S2003 in FIG. 25) executed when the initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2001 in FIG. 25: Yes), the initial value As off. Then, in the command determination process (FIG. 25) executed every millisecond, when the possessed ball addition command is detected from the main controller 110 (S2006: Yes in FIG. 25), the possessed ball addition flag In addition, 213b is set to ON, and prize ball number information indicated by the possessed ball addition command is extracted and stored in the RAM 213.

  Then, in the possessed ball number counting process (FIG. 28), when the possessed ball number addition flag 213b is turned on, the MPU 211 determines that the possessed ball addition command has been received from the main controller 110, and adds the possessed ball number. The flag 213b is set to OFF, and the number of prize balls stored in the RAM in the command determination process is added to the possessed ball counter 213a. Thus, the number of prize balls indicated by the possessed ball addition command received by the main controller 110 can be added to the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game, and the prize ball can be used as a possessed ball. Become.

  The circulating ball number memory 213c is for storing the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 as a circulating ball number in order to circulate the ball in the pachinko machine 10 and use it for a game. The circulating sphere number memory 213c is used to count the circulating sphere number. The initial ball number memory 213d is for storing the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 before the game is performed as an initial ball number.

  The initial ball number memory 213d indicates that the balls stored in the supply passage 65 based on the detection results of the 51 ball detection switch 91 and the 50 ball detection switch 92 after the power is turned on and before the game is started “50” spheres are set as the initial number of spheres on the condition that the number of spheres has been confirmed to be 50 in the embodiment. The value (50 balls) in the initial ball number memory 213d is maintained without being changed thereafter.

  In addition, the circulation ball number memory 213c detects the supply path from the detection results of the 51 ball detection switch 91 and the 50 ball detection switch 92 after the power is turned on or when the door frame 14 is detected to be closed. On the condition that the number of balls stored in 65 can be confirmed to be a predetermined number of balls (50 balls in the present embodiment), the same value as the value set in the initial ball number memory 213d, that is, “50”. A sphere is set.

  Thereafter, the circulating ball number memory 213c is updated in the circulating ball number counting process executed by the MPU 211 every millisecond. Specifically, when it is detected that a ball feed detection switch 94 that detects a ball sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66 to fire the memory ball is turned on, the ball is stored in the supply passage 65. This means that the number of spheres has been reduced by 1, so that the number of circulated spheres stored in the circulation sphere number memory 213c is decreased by 1.

  Further, when the foul ball detection switch 93 is turned on, it means that the ball launched from the ball launch unit 66 is not reached the return ball prevention member 68 but is collected as a foul ball and returned to the supply passage 65. The number of circulating spheres stored in the circulating sphere memory 213c is incremented by one.

  When the winning ball detection switch 47 is turned on, the ball guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 is selected from various winning ports (general winning port 3, starting winning port 4, and specific winning port 5a). ), And is discharged to the discharge passage 42a through the discharge port 41b and stored again in the supply passage 65. In this case as well, the number of circulating balls stored in the circulating ball number memory 213c is set to 1. to add.

  When the out ball detection switch 48 is turned on, the ball guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 passes through the out port 6 without winning any of the winning ports 3, 4, 5a. In this case, 1 is added to the number of circulating spheres stored in the circulating sphere memory 213c.

  Here, the ball detected by the ball feed detection switch 94, that is, the ball sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, is always fired by the launching unit 66, and then always the foul ball detection switch 93 and the winning ball. It should be detected by any one of the detection switch 47 and the out-sphere detection switch 48. Therefore, after the ball is finally fired in the ball launching unit 66, a time sufficient for the last fired ball to flow down the front area of the game board 13 and be collected again in the supply passage 65 (this implementation). In the embodiment, after the lapse of 30 seconds after the ball is stopped, the number of circulating spheres stored in the circulating sphere memory 213c is always equal to the initial number of spheres stored in the initial sphere memory 213d. Should be.

  In the present embodiment, by utilizing this fact, the ball launched last in the ball launch unit 66, and then the last launched ball flows down the front area of the game board 13 and is collected again in the supply passage 65. When the ball circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is all stored in the supply passage 65, such as after a sufficient time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds after the ball has stopped firing) has elapsed, The circulating sphere number stored in the circulating sphere number memory 213c is compared with the initial sphere number stored in the initial sphere number memory 213d. If the circulating ball number stored in the circulating ball number memory 213c matches the initial ball number stored in the initial ball number memory 213d, no trouble or fraud has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine It is determined that the machine 10 is in a normal state.

  In addition, when the number of circulating spheres stored in the circulating sphere memory 213c is larger than the initial number of spheres stored in the initial sphere memory 213d, an illegal act such as illegally mixing balls into the pachinko machine 10 is performed. It is determined that there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed, and this is reported as an over error.

  In addition, when the number of circulating balls stored in the circulating ball number memory 213c is smaller than the initial number of balls stored in the initial ball number memory 213d, the pachinko machine 10 is clogged with a ball in the front area of the game board 13. It is determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble such as being present has occurred, and that fact is reported as an under error.

  In a conventional in-machine circulation pachinko machine, the number of balls stored in the machine is confirmed only when the power is turned on in a state where the balls are reliably stored in the supply passage 65. The number of balls stored in the plane is checked only when the power is turned on. Basically, the balls are dispersed in various places (launch rail, ball guide passage, front area of the game board, etc.) during the game. This is because it is difficult to accurately determine the number of spheres stored in the aircraft. However, if a trouble occurs or an illegal act is performed during the game, it cannot be recognized at an early stage.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the last ball sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 is fired to the ball launch unit 66, and the front area of the game board 13 is All of the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 such as after a sufficient time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds after the sphere has stopped firing) has elapsed to be recovered again into the supply passage 65. The number of circulating spheres stored in the circulating sphere number memory 213c is compared with the initial number of spheres stored in the initial sphere number memory 213d. Check if there are any changes in the number. As a result, not only immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, but also when the player temporarily stops the game due to a break or after the game has ended, the number of balls stored in the machine can be confirmed. The troubles and frauds that occurred can be confirmed early.

  Further, when it is determined that a sufficient time has passed before the ball is fired by the ball launching unit 66, flows down the front area of the game board 13, and returns to the supply passage 65 again, it is stored in the supply passage 65. Since the number of balls is checked, if no trouble or fraud has occurred, then all the balls circulating in the plane should be stored in the supply passage 65. Therefore, by confirming the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 at that time, it is possible to accurately determine the trouble or fraud that has occurred during the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the confirmation of whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is not changed is stored in the circulation sphere memory 213c and the initial sphere memory 213d. The number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is calculated based not only on the comparison with the initial number of spheres, but also on the detection result of the spheres by the 51 ball detection switch 91 and the 50 ball detection switch 90 provided in the supply passage 65. It is done by judging. As a result, whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed is checked based on the balls discharged from the supply passage 65 and the balls recovered again in the supply passage 65. There are a plurality of methods including a method using the number of spheres, and a method of determining the storage state of the spheres in the actual supply passage 65 from the detection results of the spheres by the 51 sphere detection switch 91 and the 50 sphere detection switch 92. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a trouble or fraud that cannot be detected by one method can be detected by another method. Therefore, there is an effect that trouble and unsuccessfulness can be recognized more accurately and quickly.

  The ball collection time counting counter 213e is a counter that counts the time since the ball is sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, and is a circulating ball number counting process ( The update process is performed according to FIG. In this circulating ball number counting process, when it is determined that the ball feed detection switch 94 is on, that is, when it is determined that a ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66, the MPU 211 30000 is set in the ball collection time counter 213e. While the ball feed detection switch 94 is off, every time the circulating ball number counting process is executed, the MPU 211 sets the ball collection time count counter 213e as long as the ball collection time count counter 213e is greater than zero. Decrease by one. As a result, when the ball collection time counter 213e becomes 0, the MPU 211 determines that 30 seconds have passed since the last ball was sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66, and is stored in the supply passage 65. A second ball number determination process (see FIG. 27) for confirming the number of spheres that are present is executed.

  As a result, even when the player is playing a game, the last ball sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 is fired to the ball launch unit 66. When 30 seconds have passed enough to flow down the front area of the game board 13 and be collected again in the supply passage 65, and all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65 In addition, since the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is confirmed, troubles and frauds that occur during the game can be detected accurately and early.

  The possessed ball addition command counter 213f is a counter that counts the number of possessed ball addition commands received from the main controller 110. In addition, the winning ball counter 213g has won the number of winning balls detected by the winning ball detection switch 47, that is, various winning ports (one of the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a). It is a counter that counts the number of spheres.

  Both the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the winning ball counter 213g are the 51-ball detection switch 91 and the 50-ball detection switch when the power is turned on or when it is detected that the door frame 14 is changed from the open state to the closed state. On the condition that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 can be confirmed to be a predetermined number of balls (50 balls in this embodiment) from the detection result of 92, the initial ball number memory 213d is stored in the circulating ball number counter 213g. “0” is set as the initial value at the same stage as the stage where the “50” sphere, which is the same value as the value set in, is set.

  When the possessed ball addition command counter 213f determines that the possessed ball addition command is received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 211 every 1 millisecond, 1 is set. Is added. Also, in the winning ball counter 213f, in the circulating ball number counting process (see FIG. 26) executed every 1 millisecond, the winning ball detection switch 47 is turned on, and various winning ports (general winning port 3, starting winning port 4). 1 is added when a winning ball is detected in any of the specific winning openings 5a).

  Here, the possessed ball addition command is generated by the main control device 110 when there are winnings in any of the winning awards (the general winning award 3, the starting winning award 4, or the specific winning award 5 a), Sent to. Therefore, at least a sufficient time (after the ball is finally fired in the ball launching unit 66, the last fired ball flows down the front area of the game board 13 and is again collected in the supply passage 65 ( In the present embodiment, the possession received from the main controller 110 when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, such as after 30 seconds from the stop of the ball firing). The value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f, which is the number of ball addition commands, and the number of winning balls indicating the number of balls won in various winning ports (one of the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, or the specific winning port 5a) The value of the counter 213g should be the same value.

  In the present embodiment, using this fact, when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, is the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 unchanged? In addition to confirming whether or not, a process of comparing the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f with the value of the winning ball counter 213g is executed. Then, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the value of the winning ball counter 213g do not match, it can be determined that there has been any illegal act or trouble related to winning.

  For example, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f is larger than the value of the winning ball counter 213g, the main controller 110 holds the possessed ball even though there is no actual winning at the winning ports 3, 4, 5a. It is considered that the addition command is generated and transmitted to the counting device 111. In this case, the various winning switches (the general winning switch 44, the start winning switch 45, the specific winning switch 46) connected to the main control device 110 are considered. It is possible that an unauthorized signal was added by the radio wave. If the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f is smaller than the value of the winning ball counter 213g, the possessed ball addition command is issued by the main controller 110 even though the winning opening 3, 4, 5a has been won. In this case, there is a possibility that various winning switches (the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, the specific winning switch 46) connected to the main control device 110 are broken.

  Therefore, when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the value of the winning ball counter 213g do not match, any winning Announces a winning error indicating that there was an illegal act or trouble related to Therefore, when the player stops the game due to a break or the like, or after the game is finished, the trouble or fraudulent action related to winning can be confirmed early.

  The ball determination flag 213h is a timing at which all round effects (effects that open the specific winning opening 5a) in the single jackpot are completed and the ending effect is started when the pachinko machine 10 is on. This is a flag indicating that it is time to confirm whether or not there is any change in the number of balls circulating in 10 and whether or not there is any illegal act or trouble related to winning. In the jackpot end ball determination process (see FIG. 33) executed every 1 millisecond, the MPU 211 stops the ball discharge by the ball discharge unit 66 when the ball determination flag 213h is on, and the After 30 seconds have elapsed from the stop of the launch, that is, after a sufficient time has passed for the last fired ball to flow down the front area of the game board 13 and be collected in the supply passage 65 again, the ball circulating in the pachinko machine 10 It is confirmed whether there is any change in the number and whether there is any illegal act or trouble related to winning.

  The ball determination flag 213h is used when it is determined that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S1756: No in FIG. 22) or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S1765 in FIG. 22 or S2003 in FIG. 25), which is executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2001: Yes in FIG. 25). Off is set. In the command determination process (FIG. 25) executed every 1 millisecond, when reception of the ball determination command is detected from the main control device 110 (S2010: Yes in FIG. 25), the ball determination flag 213h is set. Set to on.

  The ball determination command is sent from the main control device 110 to the counting device 111 at the timing when all round effects (effects for opening the specific winning opening 5a) in the single jackpot are finished in the pachinko machine 10 and the ending effect is started. Sent to. Therefore, when the ball determination flag 213h is on, it is possible to confirm whether there is any change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 and whether there are any illegal acts or troubles related to winning. Every time a jackpot is made, it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 in the ending production, and whether there are any illegal acts or troubles related to winning a prize. Means. In this way, every time a jackpot effect is performed, it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 and whether there are any illegal acts or troubles related to winning a prize. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities for confirming troubles and frauds occurring during the game, and to confirm troubles and fraudulent acts that occur during the game early. In addition, confirming whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed and confirmation of whether there are any illegal acts or troubles related to winning is However, since such a confirmation is executed at the timing when the ending effect that allows the player to take a break in the game is performed, the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stop of the launch can be suppressed.

  Note that, as described above, it is desirable to perform the jackpot ending effect for at least 31 seconds. In order to confirm the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65, it is necessary to stop the ball from firing for at least 30 seconds after the launch is stopped. By giving, the player can be released from the dissatisfaction that the ball cannot fire. In addition, in the ending effect, some game effect is displayed to indicate the subsequent game state to the player, or a notice effect that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery performed on the ball held at that time You may make it perform. Thereby, a player can be released from the boring feeling by ending production becoming long.

  The under-state counter 213i is the time during which the OFF signal is continuously output from the minimum number ball detection switch 90 during a specific time after the sphere in the supply passage 65 is sent to the sphere launch unit 66, that is, the minimum sphere in the supply passage 65. It is a counter that counts the time during which no sphere continues to exist at the position where the detection switch 90 is provided. The specific time during which the time during which the OFF signal is continuously output in the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is measured is a sphere launch cycle (610 milliseconds in this embodiment) when the sphere is continuously fired. That is, the under-state counter 213i counts the time during which the OFF signal is continuously output in the minimum number ball detection switch 90 during 610 milliseconds after the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launch unit 66. .

  During the game, that is, while the balls are being launched toward the game area, at least a predetermined number A of balls (10 balls in the present embodiment) are stored in the supply passage 65 as described above. Is done. The minimum number of sphere detection switch 90 is a predetermined number A (that is, tenth) pieces from the end 65b side when spheres are stored one by one in order from the end 65b in the supply passage 65. It is provided at a position where the ball is fastened.

  When the spheres in the supply passage 65 are sent to the sphere launch unit 66, the stored spheres move toward the end portion 65b. In the supply passage 65, the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is provided except for the movement period. At a given position, the sphere is always stored, and the output of the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is turned on. Accordingly, if the minimum number ball detection switch 90 has been turned off for a long time for 610 milliseconds after the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launch unit 66, the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is provided. At least the ball is not stored in the given position, and the ball launched into the front area of the game board 13 can be collected in the supply passage 65 because the front area of the game board 13 is clogged. It can be judged that there is a high possibility that no trouble has occurred. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, this is notified as an under error.

  The under-state counter 213i determines that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (in the case of S1756: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S1765 in FIG. 22 or S2003 in FIG. 25), which is executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2001: Yes in FIG. 25). 0 is set. The under state counter 213i is updated in a normal time ball determination process executed by the MPU 211 every 1 millisecond.

  Specifically, if the value of the ball collection time counting counter 213e is 29390 or more, it means that the time since the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launching unit 66 is 610 milliseconds or less. In this case, if the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is on, the under state counter 213i is initialized to zero. On the other hand, if the value of the ball collection time counter 213e is 29390 or more and the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is off, 1 is added to the value of the under state counter 213i. When the under-state counter 213i is 305 or more, the position where the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is provided during the time 610 milliseconds after the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launching unit 66. This means that at least the ball has not been continuously present for 305 milliseconds, and in this case, the ball is not stored at the position where the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is provided, and the front of the game board 13 is not stored. It is determined that there is a high possibility that a problem has occurred in which the balls launched into the front area of the game board 13 cannot be collected in the supply passage 65 due to a clogged ball in the area, and an under error is generated. Inform.

  As a result, all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are not stored in the supply passage 65, and even while the game is being played by the player, to some extent fraud and trouble related to the under error. Can be notified. Therefore, when a trouble or the like occurs during the game, it can be recognized at an early stage by the player or the person concerned with the hall.

  The under-state counter 213i is used when the value of the ball collection time counter 213e is less than 29390, that is, when the time since the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launch unit 66 exceeds 610 milliseconds. Initialized to 0.

  The over-state counter 213j detects the time during which the ON signal is continuously output from the 51-ball detection switch 91 during a specific time after the sphere in the supply passage 65 is sent to the sphere launch unit 66, that is, the 51-sphere detection in the supply passage 65. It is a counter that counts the time that a sphere continues to exist at the position where the switch 91 is provided. The specific time during which the ON signal is continuously output in the 51-ball detection switch 91 is measured as a sphere launch cycle (610 milliseconds in this embodiment) when the sphere is continuously fired. That is, the over-state counter 213j counts the time during which the ON signal is continuously output from the 51-ball detection switch 91 during 610 milliseconds after the sphere in the supply passage 65 is sent to the sphere launch unit 66.

  During the game, that is, while the ball is being fired toward the game area, the ball does not stop at the position where the 51 ball detection switch 91 of the supply passage 65 exists. Alternatively, the sphere collected as an out sphere simply passes toward the end portion 65 b of the supply passage 65. Therefore, during the game, the output of the 51 ball detection switch 91 is turned off except when a ball passes. Accordingly, if the 51 ball detection switch 91 has been on for a long time for 610 milliseconds after the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launch unit 66, the 51 ball detection switch 91 is provided. It is possible to determine that there is a high possibility that a ball is also stored at the position, and that an illegal act such as illegally mixing the ball into the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that a clogged ball has occurred inside the supply passage 65. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, this is notified as an over error.

  The over-state counter 213j determines that the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S1756: No in FIG. 22), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S1765 in FIG. 22 or S2003 in FIG. 25), which is executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S2001: Yes in FIG. 25). 0 is set. The over state counter 213j is updated in a normal time ball determination process executed by the MPU 211 every 1 millisecond.

  Specifically, if the value of the ball collection time counting counter 213e is 29390 or more, it means that the time since the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launching unit 66 is 610 milliseconds or less. In this case, if the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on, the over state counter 213j is initialized to zero. On the other hand, when the value of the ball collection time counting counter 213e is 29390 or more and the 51 ball detection switch 91 is off, 1 is added to the value of the over state counter 213j. When the over-state counter 213j becomes 305 or more, the 51-ball detection switch 91 is located at the position where the ball from the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launching unit 66 within 610 milliseconds. This means that at least the ball has existed continuously for 305 milliseconds. In this case, the ball is also stored at the position where the 51 ball detection switch 91 is provided, and the ball is illegally mixed in the pachinko machine 10. It is determined that an illegal act such as being performed has been performed or that there is a high possibility that a ball clogging has occurred in the supply passage 65, and an over error is reported.

  As a result, all the balls that circulate in the pachinko machine 10 are not stored in the supply passage 65, and even if the game is being performed by the player, some illegal acts or troubles related to over error are caused to some extent. Can be notified. Therefore, when a trouble or the like occurs during the game, it can be recognized at an early stage by the player or the person concerned with the hall.

  The over state counter 213j is used when the value of the ball collection time counter 213e is less than 29390, that is, when the time since the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launch unit 66 exceeds 610 milliseconds. Initialized to 0.

  In addition to the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the counting device 111 has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, various flags, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values such as a counter and I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 66 so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the counting device 110 permits the launch of the ball. In addition, when the counting device 110 instructs the firing control device 112 to stop the ball firing, the firing control device 112 stops the ball firing regardless of the operation of the operation handle 51. As described above, the ball launching unit 66 includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 39 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 39a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 39, and the stop switch 39b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 39, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 39.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the card sand apparatus 70 provided on a one-to-one basis with respect to the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The card sand device 70 is configured by an MPU 271 that is an arithmetic unit, and the MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 273 that is used as a work memory. Yes. In addition, an input / output port 279 is connected to the MPU 271 via a bus line 278 including an address bus and a data bus.

  The input / output port 279 includes a card reader / writer 74 that reads and writes data from and to the membership card inserted into the card insertion slot 72, and detection and authentication of the denomination of the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 71. The banknote detection device 275 that performs the determination, various buttons 276 such as a lending button 74 and a return button 75, and various lamps 277 such as a unit price display lamp 76, a card usable lamp 78, a lending available lamp 79a, and an error display lamp 79b are connected. Has been. Further, the input / output port 279 is connected to a hall computer 263 that is a computer that comprehensively manages the entire hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed, and is a computer provided outside the card sand device 71. .

  The hall computer 263 is provided with a history recording unit (not shown) for storing a player's game history. As will be described later, the history recording unit stores history information relating to the past several games for each member card inserted into the card sand device 70. More specifically, as history information, the date and time when the member card was inserted into the card sand device 70, the date and time when the member card was removed from the card sand device 70, the identification number of the card sand device 70 that received the lending of the ball, and the number of balls lent , Counting result of possessed ball as a result of playing games, profit method by converting the count result to points, accumulated memorized profit information (saved saving data), lending rate when lending a ball, possession The exchange rate when the ball count result is converted into points, the number of prize balls from the pachinko machine 10 and the like are stored.

  As described above, when a player plays a game on any one of the pachinko machines 10, it is necessary to insert a member card into the card sanding device 70 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 when receiving a rental of a ball. Some history information is transmitted to the hall computer 263 at a predetermined timing, such as when the member card is inserted or returned. That is, when a player plays a game with any of the pachinko machines 10, some history information is always recorded in the history recording unit of the hall computer.

  In addition, the hall computer 263 includes a member database (not shown) that stores the personal information of the player who has registered as a member in a state in which the personal information is associated with the identification information of the member card.

  Here, the operation of the card sand apparatus 70 will be briefly described. First, the player inserts the membership card he possesses into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand apparatus 70 installed in association with the desired pachinko machine 10. The membership card in this embodiment is composed of a porcelain card capable of storing various information. The member card stores various information including a card identification number for identifying the card.

  For example, history information relating to the past several games is stored in the membership card. The history information stored in the membership card includes, for example, the date and time when the membership card was inserted into the card sand device 70, the date and time when the membership card was removed from the card sand device 70, the identification number of the card sand device 70 that received the lending of the ball, Number of balls lent, counting results of possessed spheres as a result of playing games, profit method converted to point results, profit information stored (saved savings data), when renting balls There are lending rates, exchange rates when the result of counting possessed balls is converted into points.

  However, when the membership card is unused (including an initialized state), no history information is stored at first, and history information is stored every time it is used.

  Among the membership cards, the specific membership card is issued to the player by receiving membership registration in advance and is owned by the individual player. The player (specific member) who owns the specific member card can know the status of each pachinko machine 10 and the like by inserting the specific member card into a predetermined data management device. Is obtained.

  On the other hand, if the player is not a specific member, the game is played using a guest member card borrowed in advance from the game hall instead of the specific member card as a member card. The guest member card is intended to be used for one day in principle, and the player's personal information is not managed in association with the card. In addition, after the hall is closed, the guest member card is collected and an initialization operation is performed to erase the history information stored in the card, and the history recording unit of the hall computer 263 is associated with the card. The work of deleting the history information stored in is performed.

  When the membership card is inserted into the card insertion slot 72 of the card sand device 70, the MPU 271 temporarily stores the various information read by the card reader / writer 274 in the RAM 273. In addition, the MPU 271 transmits all information read from the member card such as card identification information and history information to the hall computer 263. Here, various types of information are transmitted in an encrypted state to prevent fraud.

  The hall computer 263 collates the received information with information stored in the above-described history recording unit (not shown) or member database (not shown) of the hall computer 263 to perform card authentication. The hall computer 263 transmits a game permission signal to the card sand device 70 when the various information matches as a result of the collation and the validity of the card is confirmed.

  The card sand 30 that has received such a game permission signal permits the acceptance of the bill at the bill insertion slot 71 and permits the operation on the lending button 74. In addition, the lendable lamp 79a is turned on to notify the player that the ball can be lent.

  On the other hand, the hall computer 263 transmits an error signal to the card sand device 70 when the various information does not match as a result of the collation. Upon receiving the error signal, the card sand device 70 ejects the membership card from the card insertion slot 72 and rejects the ball lending request. In addition, the error display lamp 79b is turned on to notify the player, hall personnel, and the like. At this time, based on the history information stored in the membership card, the record of the surveillance camera of the hall may be confirmed, and the profit lost by the player may be compensated. This makes it possible to rescue a player who owns a member card whose validity has not been confirmed due to, for example, noise during data transmission, even though it is not a forged and illegal member card. .

  In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, (1) a member card is inserted into the card sand device 70, (2) no history information is stored in the member card, or a history stored in the member card. Under the permission condition that the information is valid, the player can borrow a ball and play a game on the pachinko machine 10.

  With this function, it is possible to suppress fraud using data tampering or forged cards. For example, when a member card with altered saving data is inserted into the card sand device 70, history information (saving data, etc.) stored in the member card and a history recording unit (not shown) of the hall computer 263 are stored. The history information (saving data, etc.) relating to the membership card stored in is not matched, and an error signal is transmitted from the hall computer 263 to the card sand device 70.

  When gaming balls are lent out and the player inserts banknotes into the banknote insertion unit 32, or when saving data is stored in the membership card, the corresponding numerical value (the amount of the input money or the savings data) Point value) is temporarily stored in the RAM 273 and displayed on the remaining amount display unit 73. In the saving data in the present embodiment, one point corresponds to one yen.

  In this state, when the lending button 74 is operated once, a ball corresponding to a predetermined amount (for example, 500 yen) is lent out within the limit of the value displayed on the remaining amount display unit 74. A lending ball signal including the number of lending balls is transmitted to the counting device 111. The number of balls lent out here is calculated based on the rental rate stored in the RAM 273. For example, when the lending rate is 4 yen per ball, 25 lending balls are lent out per 100 yen. In accordance with the lending of the ball, the card sand device 70 subtracts the value used for the lending from the input amount and the saving data temporarily stored in the RAM 273 and displays the subtracted numerical value on the remaining amount display unit 73. .

  Subsequently, the card sand device 70 writes new history information on the member card together with its own identification number. Specifically, the date and time when the member card is inserted into the card sand device 30, the identification number of the card sand device 70, the number of balls lent, the updated saving data, the loan rate, etc. are written. At the same time, the card sand device 70 transmits the history information to the hall computer 263. The hall computer 263 that has received the information newly stores the history information in a history recording unit (not shown). Thereby, the hall computer 263 can determine the validity of the membership card inserted into the card sanding device 70 using the history information newly stored in the history storage unit.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 to 21. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading processes of the various winning switches 44 to 46 are executed (S1101). That is, the state of the various winning switches 44 to 46 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switches 44 to 46 is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored in the RAM 203.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the counter buffer 203 a of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the counter buffer 203 a of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 899, 99, 99, 250) are reached, each is cleared to 0. The updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 203a of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 87 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104). A winning ball process for determining a winning ball associated with winning a prize at the specific winning opening 5a is executed (S1105), and a starting winning process for winning a prize at the starting winning opening 4 is further executed (S1106). Details of the variation process, the prize ball process, and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14, 16, and 17, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, other processes to be executed periodically are further executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). The variation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1201). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 87 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S1201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 is not changing. (S1202: No) Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 87 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1204, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number N of balls for fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 is larger than zero. It is determined (S1204). As a result, if the number of reserved balls N is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the number of reserved balls N is decremented by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area 203b to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area The data in each area is shifted, such as the hold first area, the hold third area, the hold second area, the hold fourth area, and the hold third area. After the data shift process, the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 87 is executed (S1207). The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is 0 (S1204: No), a state where a demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, It is determined whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S1208). In this determination process, after the demonstration command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, it is determined that the demonstration is in progress until it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls N is greater than zero.

  If it is determined that the demonstration is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), and this process ends. If it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S1208: Yes), This process is finished as it is. The demo command set in the processing of S1209 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1701) of the main processing (see FIG. 20) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs control so as to display a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the demo command.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation stop. Therefore, when the variable display is not started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change is stopped, the demo command can be set and the demonstration effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has passed (S1210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 87 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S1210: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 87 is updated (S1211), and this process is complete | finished.

  In this embodiment, among the LEDs 87a of the first symbol display device 87, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 87 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 87 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a change start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, in the process of S1206, it is determined whether or not a big win is made according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. Depending on the value of the counter C2, the symbol will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the big round of 15 rounds), or the 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum probability number is a high probability state after the jackpot of two rounds) Or a symbol that becomes a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variable big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 2R positive variable big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 87. Then, a confirmation command is set for confirmation (S1213), and this process is terminated. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the variation time elapses, the third symbol display device 81 stops the variation, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the change start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1207). This variation start process (S1207) is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition to performing a lottery (win / no-go determination) of “big hit” or “off”, an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of a variation effect performed on the first symbol display device 87 and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

  In the variation start process, first, a lottery (win / no-go determination) process for determining whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is performed (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, “7,307,582” associated with the “low probability state” in the jackpot random number table 202a becomes the jackpot random value, and the pachinko machine When the ten gaming states are in a high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, associated with the“ high probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are the jackpot random numbers. In the process of S1301, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit Determine.

  If it is determined as a big hit as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b, A display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, whether the maximum round number is 15R probable big hit after a big hit of 15 rounds, or the maximum round number is 2. The display mode of the first symbol display device 87 based on whether the 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a big jackpot of round or the 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds LED 87a lighting state) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is the stop type. Set as

  Next, a variation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1303). The determination of the variation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the processing of S1302, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202c. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 87 is set.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the game is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 87 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203b. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detachment, or complete detachment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. Yes.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S1305). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is a high probability state, a short time or a low probability state other than a short time), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, and the variation type counter CS1. And the deviation variation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 87 is set.

  When the processing of S1303 or S1305 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined by the processing of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 20). The

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16, the process of the winning ball process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the prize ball processing (S1105). This prize ball process (S1105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the general prize slot 3 and the specific prize slot 5a. And a possessed ball addition command is set to add the number of prize balls to the number of possessed balls counted in the counting device 111.

  When the winning ball process is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a winning in the general winning opening 3 (S1351). In this process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the general winning a prize slot 3 based on the winning detection information in the general winning a prize slot 3 stored in the RAM 203 by the switch reading process in S1101 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 13). .

  Then, when it is determined that there is a winning in the general winning opening 3 (S1351: Yes), five winning balls are determined, and five winning balls with respect to the number of possessed balls counted in the counting device 111 Is set to transmit a five-ball possessed ball addition command to the counting device 111 (S1352). The possessed ball addition command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 20).

  After the process of S1352, the process proceeds to S1353. As a result of the process of S1351, if it is determined that there is no winning in the general winning opening 3 (S1351: No), the process of S1352 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1353.

  In the process of S1353, it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the specific winning opening 5a (S1353). In this process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the specific winning slot 5a based on the winning detection information at the specific winning slot 5a stored in the RAM 203 by the switch reading process at S1101 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 13). .

  If it is determined that there is a prize at the specific prize opening 5a (S1353: Yes), 15 prize balls are determined, and 15 prize balls for the number of possessed balls counted in the counting device 111. Is set to transmit the possessed ball addition command of 15 balls to the counting device 111 (S1354). The possessed ball addition command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 20).

  After the process of S1354, the prize ball process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result of the process of S1353, when it is determined that there is no winning in the specific winning opening 5a (S1353: No), the process of S1354 is skipped, the prize ball process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the start winning process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1106). This start winning process (S1106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the start winning opening 4, and if there is a start winning, Holds the value indicated by the random number counter. In addition, when there is a start winning prize, a prize ball is determined, and a possessed ball addition command is set in order to add the number of prize balls to the number of possessed balls counted in the counting device 111.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a start winning opening 4 (start winning) (S1400). In this process, whether or not there has been a prize (start prize) for the start prize opening 4 based on the winning detection information in the start prize slot 4 stored in the RAM 203 by the switch reading process in S1101 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 13). Determine whether.

  When it is determined that the ball has won the start winning opening 4 (start winning prize) (S1400: Yes), five winning balls are determined, and the number of possessed balls counted by the counting device 111 is 5 In order to add the prize balls of the sphere, a setting is made to transmit a five-ball possessed ball addition command to the counting device 111 (S1401). The possessed ball addition command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 20).

  Following the processing of S1401, it is determined whether or not the number N of suspended balls of the variable effect held in the main controller 110 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1402). If there is no winning at the start winning opening 4 (S1400: No), or even if there is a winning at the starting winning opening 4 and the number N of active suspended balls is not N <4 (S1402: No), the timer interrupts Return to processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 4 (S1400: Yes) and the number of held balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the number of held balls N is incremented by 1 (S1403), Each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S1103 of the process of storing (FIG. 13) is determined from the free reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Store in the first area (S1404).

  Next, a reserved ball number command including the value of the reserved ball number N updated by the process of S1403 is created (S1405), the created held ball number command is set (S1406), and the start winning process is terminated. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  This reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 20). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the number of held balls N included in the number of held balls command. Then, the sound lamp control device 113 sends a hold display command to the display control device 114 so that the number of held balls managed by the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed in the hold display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. Send. This hold display command includes information indicating the number of held balls to be displayed. The display control device 114 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 so as to display the number of held balls indicated by the hold display command in the hold display area Ds.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the counting device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the counting device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the counting device 111) to be operable, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed ( S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604). If it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S1611 even in such a case. As will be described later in the processing of S1712 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the processing of S1611, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the counting device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When the counting device 111 receives this initialization command, it clears the area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which gaming ball payout control can be started. Main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203 after transmission of the initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When receiving the return command, the counting device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, output data such as commands stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 234 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13) is transferred to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the possessed ball addition command set in the prize ball processing (S1105) is transmitted to the counting device 111. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (S1106) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the counter buffer 202 b of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, next, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot state, the jackpot effect is performed, and the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed The jackpot control process is executed for this purpose (S803). The details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or It is determined whether or not a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the main process, but may be executed in a timer interrupt process.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The variation display of the second symbol is performed at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the start winning opening 4 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the processes after S1701 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203a of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 18 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1710 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power supply has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113) (S1711). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1712), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1701 to S1705 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1701. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1701. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 20). When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot, the execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and the specific winning a prize (large jackpot) This is a process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is started (S1731). Specifically, in the timer interrupt process performed immediately before the execution of the process of S1731, the process of S1212 of the fluctuation process (see FIG. 14) is executed, and the jackpot display is set as the stop display of the first symbol display device. If so, it is determined that the jackpot will be started.

  In the process of S1731, if it is determined that a big hit is to be started (S1731: Yes), a big hit medium flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S1732), and then a fanfare command is set (S1733). The jackpot control process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The jackpot hit flag is a flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 and indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot. When the jackpot flag is on, the pachinko machine 10 is jackpot. .

  The fanfare command set in the processing of S1733 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is directed to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (S1701) executed next by the MPU 201. Sent. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the fanfare command, it transmits the display fanfare command to the display control device 114. When a display fanfare command is received by the display control device 114, a fanfare effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is not started in the processing of S1731 (S1731: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is on and the jackpot is currently being hit (S1734). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends.

  In the processing of S1734, if the big hit / medium flag is off and not big hit (S1734: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1734, if the big hit flag 203e is on and if it is a big hit (S1734: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1735). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1735: Yes), the specific winning opening 5a is opened (S1737), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1737). After the round number command is set, this process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and is directed to the audio lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1701) executed next by the MPU 201. Sent. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1735 (S1735: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening 5a is satisfied (S1738). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening 5a, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) have been won after opening the specific winning opening 5a. It is determined that the closing condition is established.

  In the process of S1738, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening 5a is satisfied (S1738: Yes), the specific winning opening 5a is closed (S1739), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition for the specific winning opening 5a is not satisfied (S1738: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1740).

  In the process of S1740, if it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1740: Yes), an ending command is set (S1741), a ball determination command is further set (S1742), and this process ends. The ending command set in the process of S1741 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1701) executed next by the MPU 201, the ending command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Sent to. Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the ball determination command set in the process of S 1742 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S 1701) executed next by the MPU 201, the counting device 111. Sent to. When the counting device 111 receives the ball determination command, the ball launching unit 66 stops firing the ball, and 30 seconds have elapsed since the ball was stopped, that is, the ball that was last fired moves over the front area of the game board 13. After a sufficient amount of time has passed to flow down and be collected again in the supply passage 65, it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10, and whether there are any illegal acts or troubles related to winning a prize. Confirm that.

  Here, the ball determination command is transmitted at the start timing of the ending effect. Therefore, it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10, which is performed by the counting device 111 when the ball determination command is transmitted, and whether there is any illegal act or trouble related to winning. The confirmation is executed when an ending effect is performed at the end of the jackpot effect. In this way, every time the jackpot presentation is finished, it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 and whether there are any illegal acts or troubles related to winning a prize. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities for confirming troubles and frauds occurring during the game, and to confirm troubles and fraudulent acts that occur during the game early. In addition, confirming whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed and confirmation of whether there are any illegal acts or troubles related to winning is However, since such a confirmation is executed at the timing when the ending effect that allows the player to take a break in the game is performed, the dissatisfaction of the player due to the stop of the launch can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is desirable to perform the ending effect in the jackpot for at least 31 seconds. In order to confirm the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65, it is necessary to stop the ball from firing for at least 30 seconds after the launch is stopped. By giving, the player can be released from the dissatisfaction that the ball cannot fire. In addition, in the ending effect, some game effect is displayed to indicate the subsequent game state to the player, or a notice effect that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery performed on the ball held at that time You may make it perform. Thereby, a player can be released from the boring feeling by ending production becoming long.

  If it is not the ending start timing in the processing of S1740 (S1740: No), it is determined whether or not to end the current jackpot (S1743). In the process of S1743, if the current jackpot is to be ended (S1743: Yes), the end of the jackpot is set (S1744), the jackpot flag is set to OFF (S1745), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S1744 that it is not the timing to end the current jackpot (S1743: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  Next, an angle control process executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 212 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  In this start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1751). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S1752).

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S1754). If it is not stored (S1754: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S1764. Then, the RAM 213 is initialized (S1764, 1765).

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S8754: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1755). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1755: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed. Therefore, in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1764 and the initialization process of the RAM 213 is executed (S1764, 1765). As will be described later in the processing of S1913 in FIG. 24, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the initialization process of the RAM 213 in S1764 and S1765, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S1764), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S1765). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1759.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set (S1754: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1756: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is retained. The information on occurrence of power shutdown is cleared (S1757), and then the process proceeds to S1759.

  In the process of S1759, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S1759). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the door frame 14 is in an open state (S1760). While it is determined that the door frame 14 is in an open state (S1760: Yes), the determination in S1760 is repeatedly performed, 14 is determined to be in the closed state (S1760: No), the peripheral device of the MPU 211 is initialized, and the peripheral device is made operable (S1761), and then the first ball number determination process is performed. Execute (S1762). That is, the first ball number determination process is executed with the door frame 14 closed. The open / closed state of the door frame 14 is determined based on the detection result of the photosensor 98.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the first ball number determination process (S1762) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the first ball number determination process (S1762). As described above, the first ball number determination process is a process executed in the start-up process executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111. After the power is turned on, the door frame 14 is closed and the game is played. Confirm that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is a predetermined number (50 balls in this embodiment) when the startable state (a state in which a ball can be launched) is reached. It is a process to do.

  In this first ball number determination process, it is first determined whether or not the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on (S1801). If the 51 ball detection switch 91 is off (S1801: No), then the 50 ball detection switch 91 It is determined whether or not 92 is on (S1802). When the 51 ball detection switch 91 is off (S1801: No) and the 50 ball detection switch 92 is on (S1802: Yes), the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is 50. A predetermined number of spheres are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Therefore, in this case, “50” indicating that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is 50 is set in the circulating ball number memory 213c (S1803), and further, the initial ball number memory 213d. On the other hand, “50” indicating that the initial number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is 50 is set (S1804). Then, a possessed ball addition command counter 213f for counting the number of possessed ball addition commands received from the main controller 110, and a winning for counting the number of winning balls won in the various winning ports 3, 4, 5a. The ball counter 213g is set to “0” (S1805), and the first ball number determination process (S1762) is terminated.

  After finishing the first ball number determination process (S1762), as shown in FIG. 22, the interruption is permitted (S1763), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 24).

  Returning to FIG. 23, the description of the first ball number determination process is continued. When it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is off by the process of S1801 (S1801: No) and it is determined that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is off by the process of S1802 (S1802: No), the supply path 65 It can be determined that the number of stored spheres is less than 50. Therefore, when it can be determined that all the 50 balls that should be stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it is determined that the 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65. In the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble such as a ball clogging has occurred in the front area of the game board 13, and this is reported as an under error (S1806).

  If it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is turned on by the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the 50-ball detection switch 92 is turned on (S1807). If it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is on by the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes) and it is determined that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is on by the process of S1807 (S1807: Yes), the supply path It can be judged that 65 or more balls are stored in 65. Therefore, when all 50 balls that should have been stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it can be determined that 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. In some cases, it is determined that an illegal act such as illegally mixing balls in the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that there is a high possibility that a ball clogging has occurred in the supply passage 65, and this is reported as an over error. (S1808).

  On the other hand, if the 51-ball detection switch 91 is determined to be on by the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), and the 50-ball detection switch 92 is determined to be off by the process of S1807 (S1807: No), 50 balls There is a high possibility that at least one of the detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 is out of order. Therefore, in this case, it is notified as a switch error that there is a high possibility that at least one of the 50-ball detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 is out of order (S1809).

  Thus, after the power is turned on, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 when the door frame 14 is closed and the game can be started (a ball can be launched). However, if the predetermined number is not 50 balls, an error can be notified to prevent the game from being started with an illegal act or trouble occurring.

  After the error notification by the processes of S1806, S1808, and S1809, the first ball number determination process enters a loop state. However, in this loop state, when the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view for the purpose of eliminating the error state, a voltage is applied to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99 to reduce the engagement rod 99a. By doing so, the process for opening the door frame 14 is performed.

  That is, first, it is determined from the detection result of the photosensor 95 whether or not the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S1810), and it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated clockwise in front view. (S1810: No), the process of S1810 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a has been rotated clockwise in front view (S1810: Yes), a voltage is applied to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, the engagement rod 99a is contracted, and the door frame 14 is moved. Unlocking is performed (S1811).

  Thereafter, based on the detection result of the photosensor 98, it is determined whether or not the door frame 14 is closed (S1812). If it is determined that the door frame 14 is not closed (S1812: No), the process proceeds to S1812. Repeat the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the door frame 14 is closed (S1812: Yes), the process returns to S1810, and thereafter, the processes of S1810 to S1812 are repeatedly executed.

  Thus, even after the error is notified, even when the process in the MPU 211 is in a loop state, the door frame 14 can be opened by executing the control for driving the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99.

  Thus, after the power is turned on, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 when the door frame 14 is closed and the game can be started (a ball can be launched). Is confirmed and if the predetermined number is not 50 balls, an error is notified and the processing of the MPU 211 enters a loop state. Therefore, unless 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65, the balls are not lent out in the pachinko machine 10, and a game cannot be performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being performed in a state where the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is not 50 but an illegal act or a trouble occurs.

  In the case of such a loop state, the hall official can open the door frame 14 and check whether or not a ball is stuck in the game area or the like. Further, with the inner frame 12 opened, the lever 67c is pulled to remove the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 from the sphere removal passage 67, and whether or not there is a problem with the sphere is checked by hand. Can be replaced with the supply passage 65 anew. In this way, after the hall personnel take a measure to eliminate the error state, the power is turned on again. If the error state has been resolved, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is 50 in the first ball number determination process of the start-up process executed when the power is turned on again. Since it is determined that the ball is stored in the supply passage 65, the counting device 111 is in a state in which the ball can be rented and a game can be performed.

  Next, the main process executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 after the above startup process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 for circulation and use in the pachinko machine 10 is counted as the number of circulation balls, and the number of circulation balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 A process for confirming whether or not there is any change, a process for counting the number of possessed balls, which is the number of balls that the player can use in the game, and displaying the number of possessed balls on the data display 24, and a firing control device A process of permitting or stopping the launching of the sphere is performed on 112. As an overview, each process of S1901 to S1906 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec, and a power-off occurrence monitoring process (S1907) in the remaining time, and a clockwise rotation monitoring of the cylinder lock 21a are monitored. Processing (S1908) is executed.

  In the main process, first, as a regular process, a command determination process for determining a command received from the main controller 110 and performing a process corresponding to the command is executed (S1901), and then the number of circulating balls is counted. A circulating sphere that determines the number of circulating spheres to determine whether there is any change in the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 when 30 seconds or more have elapsed since the last sphere was launched A number counting process is executed (S1902). Next, a possessed ball count process for counting the number of possessed balls is executed (S1903), and when the return button 75 of the card sand device 70 is operated, the current possessed ball count is transmitted to the card sand device 70. As a result, a settlement process for performing settlement is executed (S1904). Then, when the ending effect in the jackpot effect is performed, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is determined, and a jackpot end ball determination process is performed to check whether there is any change in the number of circulating balls ( S1905) Further, when a ball is continuously fired, a normal time ball determination process is executed to determine the number of balls in the supply passage 65 and check whether there is any change in the number of circulating balls (S1905) S1906), the periodic process is terminated.

  For details of the command determination process (S1901), refer to FIG. 25. For details of the circulating ball number counting process (S1902), refer to FIG. 26. For details of the possessed ball number counting process (S1903), refer to FIG. 28, with reference to FIG. 32 for details of the settlement process (S1904), and with reference to FIG. 33 for details of the jackpot end ball determination process (S1905), a normal time ball determination process (S1906). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1907). If the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1907: Yes), a power failure occurs. Alternatively, the power is shut off when the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 18 has been executed. The

  First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1911), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the launch control device 112) (S1912). . Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1913), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S1914), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  Note that the processing of S1907 is executed at the timing when the series of processing performed in S1901 to S1906 ends or when one cycle of the processing of S1907 to 1910 performed within the remaining time ends. Accordingly, in the main process of the counting device 111, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each process is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power supply interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. You can start with the process. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S1751), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1901. Therefore, the control burden on the counting device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the counting device 111 to malfunction or run away.

  Further, as a result of the processing in S1907, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1907: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, based on the detection result of the photosensor 95, it is determined whether or not the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S1908), and the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view. If it is determined that the door frame 14 has been opened (S1908: Yes), a door frame opening process for performing control for opening the door frame 14 is executed (1909), and the process proceeds to S1910. If it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a has not been rotated clockwise in front view (S1908: No), the door frame opening process is skipped and the process proceeds to S1910.

  In the process of S1910, whether or not the execution timing of the next periodic process (the processes of S1901 to S1906) has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (1 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous periodic process. If it is determined (S1910) and the predetermined time has already passed (S1910: Yes), the process proceeds to S1901, and each process after S1901 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1910: No), the process returns to S1907 until the predetermined time is reached, and the processes of S1907 to S1910 are repeatedly executed.

  Next, a command determination process (S1901) executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. The command determination process (S1901) is to determine a command received from the main controller 110 and perform a process corresponding to the command.

  The command received from main controller 110 is temporarily stored in a command storage area provided in RAM 213. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. In the command determination process, among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, the first stored command is read, the command is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and an initialization command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S2001). If it is determined that the initialization command has been received (S2001: Yes), the RAM 213 work area is cleared to 0 (S2002), and the initial value at initialization is set in the work area to initialize the RAM 213. (S2003), initialization of the work area of the RAM 213 is executed. And a count permission signal is transmitted to the card sand apparatus 70 provided corresponding to this pachinko machine 10 (S2005), and a command determination process is complete | finished. Upon receiving the counting permission signal from the counting device 111, the card sand device 70 becomes ready to accept a membership card on the condition that the setting of the lending rate is completed based on the signal from the hall computer 263. . As a result, the lending ball signal is transmitted from the card sand device 70 in a state where the work area of the RAM 213 is initialized, and counting of the number of possessed balls can be started from the initialized state. .

  As a result of the process of S2001, if it is determined that the initialization command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a return command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2004). If it is determined that the return command has been received (S2004: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described processing of S2005, and a count permission signal is transmitted to the card sand device 70 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 10. (S2005), the command determination process is terminated. Thereby, the card sand device 70 can accept the membership card on the condition that the setting of the lending rate is completed based on the signal from the hall computer 263 while the value of the work area of the RAM 213 is held. Therefore, the lending ball signal is transmitted from the card sand device 70 in a state where the value of the work area in the RAM 213 is maintained, and counting of the possessed balls can be started from this state.

  If it is determined that the return command has not been received as a result of the process of S2004 (S2004: No), it is then determined whether a possessed ball addition command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2006). If it is determined that the possessed ball addition command has been received (S2006: Yes), the possessed ball addition flag 213b is turned on (S2007), and the winning ball number information indicated by the received possessed ball number addition command is stored in the RAM 213. Temporary storage is performed (S2008). The prize ball number indicated by the prize ball number information stored in the process of S2008 is added to the possession ball counter 213a in the possession ball number counting process (see FIG. 28). Thereafter, 1 is added to the possessed ball addition command counter 213f that counts the number of received possessed ball addition commands (S2009), and the command determination process ends.

  If it is determined that the possessed ball addition command has not been received as a result of the process of S2006 (S2006: No), it is then determined whether or not a ball determination command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2010). If it is determined that a ball determination command has been received (S2010: Yes), the ball determination flag 213h is turned on (S2011), and the command determination process is terminated. By turning on the ball determination flag 213h, in the jackpot end ball determination process (see FIG. 33), it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10, and illegal activities and troubles related to winning. Check whether there is any. Note that the ball determination command is sent from the main controller 110 to the counting device at the timing when all round effects (effects that open the specific winning opening 5a) in the single jackpot are finished in the pachinko machine 10 and the ending effect is started. 111 is transmitted. Therefore, every time a big hit is made, in the ending production, check whether there is any change in the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10, and check whether there is any illegal act or trouble related to winning Will be done.

  As a result of the process of S2010, when it is determined that the ball determination command has not been received (S2010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. (S2010), the command determination process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the circulating ball number counting process (S1902) executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the circulating ball number counting process. The circulating ball number counting process (S1902) is a process of counting the number of balls that are circulated in the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the supply passage 65 for use in the game as the circulating ball number. The circulating ball number counting process determines the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 when 30 seconds or more have elapsed since the last ball was fired, and there is no change in the number of circulating balls. Whether to check whether or not.

  In the circulating ball number counting process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball feed detection switch 94 for detecting a ball sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66 is turned on immediately before the ball is launched (S2101). If it is determined that the ball feed detection switch 94 is on (S2101: Yes), a ball is sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, and one ball stored in the supply passage 65 is one ball. Since it means that it has decreased, the value of the circulating ball number memory 213b is decreased by 1 (S2102). Then, after setting 30000 in the ball collection time counting counter 213e (S2103), the process proceeds to S2108.

  In the process of S2108, it is determined whether or not the foul ball detection switch 93 is on (S2108). If it is determined that the foul ball detection switch 93 is on (S2108: Yes), the ball fired from the ball launch unit 66 does not reach the return ball prevention member 68 and is collected as a foul ball and is supplied to the supply passage 65. This means that the number of circulating spheres stored in the circulating sphere number memory 213c is incremented by 1 (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. If it is determined as a result of the process in S2108 that the foul sphere detection switch 93 is not on but off (S2108: No), the process of S2109 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2110.

  In the process of S2110, it is determined whether or not the out-sphere detection switch 48 is on (S2110). If it is determined that the out-ball detection switch 48 is on (S2110: Yes), the ball guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 wins in any of the winning openings 3, 4, 5a. Without passing through the out port 6, it is discharged to the discharge passage 42a and stored again in the supply passage 65, so that the number of circulating balls stored in the circulating ball number memory 213c is incremented by 1 (S2111). ), The process proceeds to S2112. As a result of the process of S2110, when it is determined that the out-sphere detection switch 48 is not on but off (S2110: No), the process of S2111 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2112.

  In the process of S2112, it is determined whether or not the winning ball detection switch 47 is ON (S2112). When it is determined that the winning ball detection switch 47 is on (S2112: Yes), the balls guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 are various winning holes (general winning opening 3, start winning prize). Or any one of the special winning opening 5a), and is discharged to the discharge passage 42a through the discharge port 41b and stored again in the supply passage 65, and is stored in the circulation ball number memory 213c. The number of circulating spheres is incremented by 1 (S2113). Further, 1 is added to the winning ball counter 213g that counts the number of winning balls (S2114), and the circulating ball number counting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S2112 that the winning ball detection switch 47 is not on but off (S2112: No), the processing of S2113 and S2114 is skipped and the circulating ball number counting processing is terminated. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2101 that the ball feed detection switch 94 is not on but off (S2101: No), the ball is not sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66. Means the situation. Therefore, in this case, the value of the ball collection time count counter 213f is decremented by 1 (S2104), and it is determined whether or not the value of the ball collection time count counter 213f after decrementing by 1 has become 0 (S2105).

  Here, the circulating ball number counting process (S1902) is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process shown in FIG. Therefore, when the ball collection time counting counter 213f becomes 0, it means that 30 seconds have passed since the ball was finally sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 and fired. Then, after 30 seconds, the last ball sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 is fired to the ball launch unit 66, and the front area of the game board 13 is It means that sufficient time has passed to flow down and be collected again in the supply passage 65. Therefore, when the ball collection time counting counter 213f is 0, all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Therefore, in the process of S2105, when it is determined that the value of the ball collection time counting counter 213f is 0 (S2105: Yes), the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is determined and the number of circulating spheres is changed. A second ball number determination process is performed to check whether or not there is (S2106). Then, after the second ball number determination process (S2106) is completed, the above-described processes of S2108 to S2114 are executed, and the circulating ball number counting process is ended. If the value of the ball collection time counter 213f is not 0 in the process of S2105, that is, if the value is larger than 0 (S2105: No), the second ball number determination process (S2106) is skipped, and the above-described process is performed. The processes of S2108 to S2114 are executed, and then the circulating ball number counting process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the second ball number determination process (S2106) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the second ball number determination process (S2106).

  In the second ball number determination process, first, a post-error determination flag (not shown) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is temporarily set to OFF (S2211). This flag after error determination is a flag indicating that determination (error notification) that an error has occurred is performed at least once in the second ball number determination process that is being executed this time. is there.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on (S2212). If the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on (S2212: Yes), the process proceeds to S2213 and the 50 ball detection switch 92 is on. It is determined whether or not (S2213). As a result of the process of S2212, when the 51-sphere detection switch 91 is not on but off (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2216, and in the process of S2216 as well as the process of S2213 It is determined whether or not the sphere detection switch 92 is on (S2216).

  If it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is turned on by the process of S2212 (S2212: Yes) and it is determined that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is turned on by the process of S2213 (S2213: Yes), the circulation ball It can be determined that the number is larger than 50 balls, that is, 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. Therefore, when all 50 balls that should have been stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it can be determined that 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. In some cases, it is determined that an illegal act such as illegally mixing balls in the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that there is a high possibility that a ball clogging has occurred in the supply passage 65, and this is reported as an over error. (S2214). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2225.

  If it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is turned on by the process of S2212 (S2212: Yes) and the 50-ball detection switch 92 is turned off by the process of S2213 (S2213: No), 50 balls There is a high possibility that at least one of the detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 is out of order. Therefore, in this case, it is notified as a switch error that there is a high possibility that at least one of the 50-ball detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 is out of order (S2215). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2225.

  Further, if the 51 ball detection switch 91 is determined to be off by the process of S2212 (S2212: No), and the 50 ball detection switch 92 is determined to be off by the process of S2216 (S2216: No), the circulation ball It can be determined that the number is less than 50, that is, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is less than 50. Therefore, when it can be determined that all the 50 balls that should be stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it is determined that the 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65. In the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble such as a ball clogging has occurred in the front area of the game board 13, and this is reported as an under error (S2217). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2225.

  On the other hand, when the 51 ball detection switch 91 is off (S2212: No) and the 50 ball detection switch 92 is on (S2216: Yes), a ball is stored at the position of the 51 ball detection switch 91 in the supply passage 65. This means that a sphere is stored at the position of the 50-ball detection switch 92 in the supply passage 65. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether or not a post-error determination flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 2213 is on (S2218), and the post-error determination flag is not on but off (S2218: No). If the determination that there is an error (error notification) has not been performed even once in the second ball number determination process being executed, this is counted by the circulation ball number counting process (see FIG. 27). The value of the circulating ball number memory 213b representing the number of circulating balls stored in the supply passage 65 and the value of the initial ball number memory 213c representing the initial number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 before the game is played. By comparing, it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of circulating spheres.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the circulation ball number memory 213a is larger than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b (S2219), and the value of the circulation ball number memory 213a is the initial ball number memory. When the value is larger than “50” of 213b (S2219: Yes), it is determined that there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as an illegal act of illegally mixing a ball into the pachinko machine 10 has been performed. This is notified as an over error (S2220). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2225.

  If the value of the circulating ball number memory 213a is equal to or less than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b (S2219: No), then the value of the circulating ball number memory 213a is the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b. If the value of the circulating ball number memory 213a is smaller than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b (S2221: Yes), the front surface of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 is determined. It is determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble such as a ball clogging has occurred in the area, and this is notified as an under error (S2222). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2225.

  On the other hand, the value of the circulation ball number memory 213a is equal to or less than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b (S2219: No), and the value of the circulation ball number memory 213a is equal to or greater than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b. When it is determined (S2221: No), since the value of the circulating ball number memory 213a matches the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b, the comparison of these values is performed before the game is performed. It can be determined that 50 balls, which are the initial number of balls stored in the supply passage 65, are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Therefore, this time, the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f indicating the number of possessed ball addition commands received from the main controller 110 is a winning ball counter 213g indicating the number of balls won in the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a. It is determined whether or not the value is different (S2223).

  Here, the possessed ball addition command is generated by the main control device 110 when there are winnings in any of the winning awards (the general winning award 3, the starting winning award 4, or the specific winning award 5 a), Sent to. Therefore, at least a sufficient time (after the ball is finally fired in the ball launching unit 66, the last fired ball flows down the front area of the game board 13 and is again collected in the supply passage 65 ( In the present embodiment, the possession received from the main controller 110 when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, such as after 30 seconds from the stop of the ball firing). The value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f, which is the number of ball addition commands, and the number of winning balls indicating the number of balls won in various winning ports (one of the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, or the specific winning port 5a) The value of the counter 213g should be the same value.

  If the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f is different from the value of the winning ball counter 213g as a result of the processing of S2223 (S2223: Yes), it can be determined that there has been any illegal act or trouble related to winning.

  For example, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f is larger than the value of the winning ball counter 213g, the main controller 110 holds the possessed ball even though there is no actual winning at the winning ports 3, 4, 5a. It is considered that the addition command is generated and transmitted to the counting device 111. In this case, the various winning switches (the general winning switch 44, the start winning switch 45, the specific winning switch 46) connected to the main control device 110 are considered. It is possible that an unauthorized signal was added by the radio wave. If the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f is smaller than the value of the winning ball counter 213g, the possessed ball addition command is issued by the main controller 110 even though the winning opening 3, 4, 5a has been won. In this case, there is a possibility that various winning switches (the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, the specific winning switch 46) connected to the main control device 110 are broken.

  Therefore, in this case, a winning error indicating that there has been any illegal act or trouble related to winning is notified (S2224). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2225.

  On the other hand, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f matches the value of the winning ball counter 213g as a result of the processing of S2223 (S2223: No), it is determined that there is no fraud or trouble related to winning, and the second ball The number determination process ends, and the process returns to the circulating ball number counting process.

  In the processing of S2225, interrupt inhibition is set (S2225). Next, it is determined from the detection result of the photosensor 95 whether or not the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S2226). When the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S2226: Yes), a voltage is applied to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, the engagement rod 99a is contracted, and the door frame 14 is unlocked (S2229).

  Thereafter, based on the detection result of the photosensor 98, it is determined whether or not the door frame 14 is closed (S2230). If it is determined that the door frame 14 is not closed (S2230: No), the process proceeds to S2230. Repeat the process.

  As a result of the process of S2226, when it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated clockwise in front view (S2226: No), or when the door frame 14 is determined to be closed as a result of the process of S2230 (S2230: Yes) determines whether or not the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S2231), and while it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has not been operated (S2231: No), the processing of S2226 to S2231 Repeatedly. If it is determined that the error release button 120 has been operated (S2231: Yes), the process exits the loop process of S2226 to S2231, and proceeds to the process of S2232.

  After various errors are notified by the loop processing in S2226 to S2231, the door frame 14 can be opened by executing control for driving the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99. Thereby, the hall personnel can open the door frame 14 after being notified of various errors, and can confirm whether or not a ball is clogged and remains in the game area or the like. Also, while the loop processing in S2226 to S2231 is being performed, with the inner frame 12 opened, the lever 67c is pulled to extract the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 from the sphere extraction passage 67, and there is a problem with the sphere. It is possible to check whether or not there is a problem, or to replace another sphere with the supply passage 65. In this way, after the hall personnel take a measure to eliminate the error state, the hall personnel operates the error release button 120, and the process proceeds to S2232.

  In the processing of S2232, the error notification is canceled (S2232), and then an error determination post-provided flag provided in the RAM 213 is set to ON (S2233). Then, returning to the processing of S2212, it is determined again from the detection results of the 51 ball detection switch 91 and the 50 ball detection switch 92 whether or not the number of all the balls stored in the supply passage 65 is 50. Then, unless it is determined that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is 50, any one of the under error notification, the over error notification, and the switch error notification is notified again, and the process proceeds to S2225 again. To do.

  On the other hand, after the error determination flag is turned on in the process of S2233, the process returns to the process of S2212, and all the balls stored in the supply passage 65 are detected from the detection results of the 51-ball detection switch 91 and the 50-ball detection switch 92. When it is determined that the number is 50 balls, it is determined by the processing of S2218 that the post-error determination flag is on (S2218: Yes), and the processing proceeds to S2234.

  In the process of S2234, the initial ball number “50” is set in the circulating ball number memory 213b (S2234), then the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the winning ball counter 213g are set to 0 (S2235). The two-ball number determination process ends, and the process returns to the circulating ball number counting process.

  As described above, when it is determined that 30 seconds have passed since the last ball was sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66, the second ball number determination process is executed and stored in the supply passage 65. The number of spheres is confirmed.

  In a conventional in-machine circulation pachinko machine, the number of balls stored in the machine is confirmed only when the power is turned on in a state where the balls are reliably stored in the supply passage 65. The number of balls stored in the plane is checked only when the power is turned on. Basically, the balls are dispersed in various places (launch rail, ball guide passage, front area of the game board, etc.) during the game. This is because it is difficult to accurately determine the number of spheres stored in the aircraft. However, if a trouble occurs or an illegal act is performed during the game, it cannot be recognized at an early stage.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed since the last ball was sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, the second ball number determination process is executed, and the supply passage Since the number of balls stored in 65 is confirmed, even if the player is playing a game, the last time the ball is sent from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, the last The ball sent to the ball launching unit 66 is fired to the ball launching unit 66, flows down the front area of the game board 13, and passes through the pachinko machine 10 after 30 seconds sufficient to be collected again in the supply passage 65. When all of the balls are stored in the supply passage 65, it is possible to confirm whether or not the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is a predetermined number. If it is confirmed that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is different from the predetermined number (50 balls in the present embodiment), it may cause troubles such as clogging of balls during the game or illegally. It can be recognized that an illegal act such as a ball is mixed. Therefore, troubles and frauds that occur during the game can be detected accurately and early.

  Further, in the second ball number determination process, whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed is confirmed by the 51 ball detection switch 91 and the 50 ball detection switch 90 provided in the supply passage 65. Not only based on the detection result of the sphere, but also by comparing the number of circulating spheres stored in the circulating sphere number memory 213c with the initial number of spheres stored in the initial sphere number memory 213d. As a result, whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed is confirmed based on the detection results of the spheres in the 51 sphere detection switch 91 and the 50 sphere detection switch 92, and the storage of the spheres in the actual supply passage 65. A plurality of methods including a method of judging the state and a method of using the number of circulating spheres counted based on the sphere discharged from the supply passage 65 and the sphere recovered again in the supply passage 65 Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a trouble or fraud that cannot be detected by one method can be detected by another method. Therefore, there is an effect that trouble and unsuccessfulness can be recognized more accurately and quickly.

  In the second ball number determination process, if all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is not changed. In addition, a process of comparing the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f with the value of the winning ball counter 213g is executed. Thus, when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the value of the winning ball counter 213g do not match, It is possible to notify a winning error indicating that there has been an illegal act or trouble related to winning. Therefore, when the player stops the game due to a break or the like, or after the game is finished, the trouble or fraudulent action related to winning can be confirmed early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the possessed ball number counting process (S1903) executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the possessed ball number counting process. The possessed ball number counting process is a process of counting the number of possessed balls.

  In this possessed ball number counting process, first, the possessed ball change flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is temporarily set to OFF (S2301). This possessed ball change flag is a flag indicating that the possessed ball counter 213a for counting the number of possessed balls has been updated in the current possessed ball counting process when turned on.

  Next, it is determined whether a lending ball signal is received from the card sand device 70 (S2302). As a result, when the lending ball signal is received (S2302: Yes), it means that the lending of the ball is instructed from the card sand device 70, so the number of lending balls included in the lending ball signal is extracted, The extracted number of lent balls is added to the possessed ball counter 213a (S2303). This makes it possible to use the rented ball as a possessed ball in the game.

  Then, the possessed ball change flag is set to ON (S2304), and a reception completion signal notifying that the lending ball signal has been received is transmitted to the card sand device 70 (S2305), and the process proceeds to S2306.

  Further, as a result of the process of S2302, when the lending ball signal is not received from the card sand device 70 (S2302: No), the process proceeds to S2306 as it is.

  In the process of S2306, it is determined whether or not the possessed ball addition flag 213b is on (S2306). If the possessed ball addition flag 213b is on (S2306: Yes), a possessed ball addition command is received from the main controller 110. That is, the number of prize balls indicated by the possession ball addition command temporarily stored in the RAM 213 after the possession ball addition flag 213b is set to OFF (S2307). Is added to the possessed ball counter 213a (S2308). This makes it possible to use the prize ball as a possessed ball in the game.

  Thereafter, the possessed ball change flag is set to ON (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. If the possessed ball addition flag 213b is off instead of on (S2306: No) as a result of the process of S2306, the process proceeds to S2310 as it is.

  In the process of S2310, it is determined whether or not the game ball detection switch 68a is on (S2310). If the game ball detection switch 68a is on (S2310: Yes), it means that the ball has been guided to the front area (game area) of the game board 13, that is, one of the possessed balls is played. Since it means that it has been used, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a is decremented by 1 (S2311). Then, the possessed ball change flag is set to ON (S2312), and the process proceeds to S2313. As a result of the processing in S2310, when the game ball detection switch 68a is not on but off (S2310: No), the processing directly proceeds to S2313.

  In S2313, it is determined whether or not the possessed ball change flag is on (S2313). If the possessed ball change flag is off instead of on (S2313: No), the number of possessed balls is determined in this possessed ball counting process. Since the possessed ball counter 213a to be counted has not been updated, the possessed ball count process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the possessed ball change flag is on as a result of the processing of S2313 (S2313: Yes), this means that the possessed ball counter 213a for counting the number of possessed balls has been updated in the current possessed ball counting process. First, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the possessed ball counter 213a is 0 (S2314). As a result, when the value of the possessed ball counter 213a after the update is 0 (S2314: Yes), it means that the possessed ball has been exhausted, so the launch control device 112 is instructed to stop firing the ball ( S2315) and the process proceeds to S2317. On the other hand, when the value of the updated possessed ball counter 213a is not 0 (S2314: No), since the possessed ball exists, the launch control device 112 is instructed to permit the launch of the ball (S2316), and the process of S2317 Migrate to

  In the processing of S2317, the data display 24 is instructed to display the number of possessed balls indicated by the possessed ball counter 213a (S2317), and the possessed ball number counting process is terminated. Through the processing of S2317, the number of possessed balls indicated by the updated possessed ball counter 213a is displayed on the data display 24.

  Next, referring to FIG. 29, the door frame opening process (when the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in the front view in the main process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111) S1909) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the door frame opening process. The door frame opening process performs a process for performing control for opening the door frame 14.

  In the door frame opening process, first, the firing control device 112 is instructed to stop firing the ball (S2401). Upon receiving the stop of the ball launch, the launch control device 112 opens the gate provided at the end 65b of the supply passage 65 and opens the gate to send the ball to the ball launch unit 66 from the supply passage 65. The ball launching operation by the ball launching unit 66 is stopped. Thereby, the launch of the sphere is stopped.

  Next, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the launch of the sphere was stopped by the process of S2401 (S2402). As a result, when it is determined that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the launch of the sphere was stopped (S2402: No), the display control of the level meter 22 is performed (S2403), and the process of S2402 is executed again. The In the process of S2402, it is determined that 30 seconds have elapsed since the launch of the sphere was stopped (S2402: Yes), and the display control process (S2403) of the level meter 22 is repeatedly executed.

  As the display control processing of the level meter 22, when 5 seconds have passed since the ball was stopped, the LED provided in the bottom rectangular area of the level meter 22 is turned on, and further 5 seconds have elapsed. If this occurs (when 10 seconds have passed since the ball was stopped), the level meter 22 turns on the LED provided in the second rectangular area from the bottom. Whenever 5 seconds elapses, the level meter 22 sequentially turns on the LEDs provided in the rectangular areas from the bottom, and when 30 seconds elapse after the ball is stopped, the level meter 22 The LED of the circular area | region provided above the rectangular area | region is lighted.

  As will be described in detail below, the door frame 14 has passed 30 seconds after stopping the launch of the sphere, and further, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is determined to change the number of circulated spheres. After the process of confirming whether or not there is, unlocking is performed. That is, the door frame 14 remains locked until at least 30 seconds elapse after the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view. In the present embodiment, since the elapsed time until the door frame 14 is unlocked can be visually recognized by the level meter 22 during that time, the progress of the waiting time until the door frame 14 is unlocked can be notified to the player, and The psychological burden felt during the period can be reduced.

  If it is determined in the process of S2402 that 30 seconds have elapsed since the launch of the sphere was stopped (S2402: Yes), then the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is determined to determine the number of circulating spheres. A third ball number determination process for checking whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (S2404).

  Here, the details of the third ball number determination process (S2404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the third ball number determination process.

  In the third ball number determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on (S2501). If the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on (S2501: Yes), the process proceeds to S2502. Whether or not the 50-ball detection switch 92 is on is determined (S2502). As a result of the process of S2501, when the 51-sphere detection switch 91 is not on but off (S2501: No), the process proceeds to S2505. In the process of S2505, as in the process of S2502, 50 It is determined whether or not the sphere detection switch 92 is on (S2505).

  If it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is turned on by the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes) and it is determined that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is turned on by the process of S2502 (S2502: Yes), the circulation ball It can be determined that the number is larger than 50 balls, that is, 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. Therefore, when all 50 balls that should have been stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it can be determined that 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. In some cases, it is determined that an illegal act such as illegally mixing balls in the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that there is a high possibility that a ball clogging has occurred in the supply passage 65, and this is reported as an over error. (S2503). Thereafter, the third ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  If it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is on by the process of S2501 (S2501: Yes) and it is determined that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is off by the process of S2502 (S2502: No), 50 balls There is a high possibility that at least one of the detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 is out of order. Therefore, in this case, it is notified as a switch error that there is a high possibility that at least one of the 50-ball detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 is out of order (S2504). Thereafter, the third ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is off by the process of S2501 (S2501: No) and it is determined that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is off by the process of S2505 (S2505: No), the circulating sphere It can be determined that the number is less than 50, that is, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is less than 50. Therefore, when it can be determined that all the 50 balls that should be stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it is determined that the 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65. In the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble such as a ball clogging has occurred in the front area of the game board 13, and this is reported as an under error (S2506). Thereafter, the third ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  On the other hand, when the 51 ball detection switch 91 is off (S2501: No) and the 50 ball detection switch 92 is on (S2505: Yes), a ball is stored at the position of the 51 ball detection switch 91 in the supply passage 65. This means that a sphere is stored at the position of the 50-ball detection switch 92 in the supply passage 65. Therefore, this time, the value of the circulating ball number memory 213b indicating the number of circulating balls stored in the supply passage 65 counted by the circulating ball number counting process (see FIG. 27), and the supply passage 65 before the game is played. Is compared with the value of the initial ball number memory 213c representing the initial ball number stored in the table, it is confirmed whether or not there is any change in the number of circulating balls.

  Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the circulation ball number memory 213a is larger than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b (S2507), and the value of the circulation ball number memory 213a is the initial ball number memory. If the value is larger than the value “50” of 213b (S2507: Yes), it is determined that there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as an illegal act of illegally mixing a ball into the pachinko machine 10 has been performed. This is notified as an over error (S2508). Thereafter, the third ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  If the value of the circulating ball number memory 213a is equal to or less than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b (S2507: No), then the value of the circulating ball number memory 213a is the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b. If the value of the circulating ball number memory 213a is smaller than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b (S2509: Yes), the front surface of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 is determined. It is determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble such as a ball clogging has occurred in the area, and this is reported as an under error (S2510). Thereafter, the third ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  On the other hand, the value of the circulation ball number memory 213a is equal to or less than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b (S2507: No), and the value of the circulation ball number memory 213a is equal to or greater than the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b. When it is determined (S2509: No), since the value of the circulating ball number memory 213a matches the value “50” of the initial ball number memory 213b, in comparison of these values, before the game is performed. It can be determined that 50 balls, which are the initial number of balls stored in the supply passage 65, are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Therefore, this time, the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f indicating the number of possessed ball addition commands received from the main controller 110 is a winning ball counter 213g indicating the number of balls won in the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a. It is determined whether or not the value is different (S2511).

  Here, the possessed ball addition command is generated by the main control device 110 when there are winnings in any of the winning awards (the general winning award 3, the starting winning award 4, or the specific winning award 5 a), Sent to. Therefore, at least a sufficient time (after the ball is finally fired in the ball launching unit 66, the last fired ball flows down the front area of the game board 13 and is again collected in the supply passage 65 ( In the present embodiment, the possession received from the main controller 110 when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, such as after 30 seconds from the stop of the ball firing). The value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f, which is the number of ball addition commands, and the number of winning balls indicating the number of balls won in various winning ports (one of the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, or the specific winning port 5a) The value of the counter 213g should be the same value.

  If the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f is different from the value of the winning ball counter 213g as a result of the processing of S2511 (S2511: Yes), it can be determined that there has been any illegal act or trouble related to winning.

  For example, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f is larger than the value of the winning ball counter 213g, the main controller 110 holds the possessed ball even though there is no actual winning at the winning ports 3, 4, 5a. It is considered that the addition command is generated and transmitted to the counting device 111. In this case, the various winning switches (the general winning switch 44, the start winning switch 45, the specific winning switch 46) connected to the main control device 110 are considered. It is possible that an unauthorized signal was added by the radio wave. If the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f is smaller than the value of the winning ball counter 213g, the possessed ball addition command is issued by the main controller 110 even though the winning opening 3, 4, 5a has been won. In this case, there is a possibility that various winning switches (the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, the specific winning switch 46) connected to the main control device 110 are broken.

  Therefore, in this case, a winning error indicating that there has been any illegal act or trouble related to winning is notified (S2512). Thereafter, the third ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f matches the value of the winning ball counter 213g as a result of the processing of S2511 (S2511: No), it is determined that there is no illegal act or trouble related to winning and an error is notified. Instead, the third ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description of the door frame opening process will be continued. When the third ball number determination process (S2404) is completed, a voltage is then applied to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, the engagement rod 99a is contracted, and the door frame 14 is unlocked (S2405).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view during the game and the unlocking of the door frame 21 is instructed, first, the ball is stopped and the ball is released. The door frame 14 is unlocked after at least 30 seconds have passed since the stop.

  Here, in the in-flight circulation pachinko machine 10, as described above, the ball is circulated inside the pachinko machine 10, so that the player cannot touch the ball, and the player uses the pachinko machine 10. Inappropriate acts such as exchanging the ball or changing the movement of the ball in the game area by oiling the ball cannot be performed.

  In such an in-machine circulation pachinko machine 10, when configured so that the door frame 14 is immediately unlocked when the key inserted into the keyhole 21 b is turned clockwise during gaming, It is highly possible that the ball is flowing down the front area of the game board 13 when the frame 14 is opened, and the cheating person who unlocks the door frame 14 in order to perform cheating can easily touch the ball. Can do. Therefore, a fraudster may easily perform a fraud such as extracting a ball flowing down the front area of the game board 13 and replacing it with a fraudulent ball or oiling the ball. There is.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, when the door frame 14 is locked by the electronic lock 99, and the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned rightward during the game, first, the ball is stopped from firing, After a sufficient amount of time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds after the ball has stopped firing) has elapsed since the ball fired before stopping flows down the front area of the game board 13 and is again collected in the supply passage 65, By driving the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, the engagement state between the engagement rod 99 of the electronic lock 99 and the protruding portion 96a of the door frame 14 can be released, and the door frame 14 can be unlocked. Thereby, even if the unlocking of the door frame 14 is instructed by inserting the key into the keyhole 21b and turning it rightward during the game, the ball fired during the game is in front of the game board 13. During the flow down, at least the door frame 14 can be kept closed. Therefore, when the door frame 14 is opened, the ball can be stored in the supply passage 65 covered with the cover, so that the player can not touch the ball built in the pachinko machine 14, It is possible to prevent cheating.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view during the game and the unlocking of the door frame 21 is instructed, after 30 seconds have elapsed from the stop of the ball launch, Before unlocking the frame 14, a third ball number determination process is executed to determine the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 and confirm whether there is any change in the number of circulating balls.

  In a conventional in-machine circulation pachinko machine, the number of balls stored in the machine is confirmed only when the power is turned on in a state where the balls are reliably stored in the supply passage 65. The number of balls stored in the plane is checked only when the power is turned on. Basically, the balls are dispersed in various places (launch rail, ball guide passage, front area of the game board, etc.) during the game. This is because it is difficult to accurately determine the number of spheres stored in the aircraft. However, if a trouble occurs or an illegal act is performed during the game, it cannot be recognized at an early stage.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view during the game and the unlocking of the door frame 21 is instructed, after 30 seconds have elapsed from the stop of the ball firing. Before the door frame 14 is unlocked, the third ball number determination process is executed to determine the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 and confirm whether there is any change in the number of circulating balls. Therefore, when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, it is possible to confirm whether or not the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is a predetermined number. it can. If it is confirmed that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is different from the predetermined number (50 balls in the present embodiment), it may cause troubles such as clogging of balls during the game or illegally. It can be recognized that an illegal act such as a ball is mixed. Therefore, troubles and frauds that occur during the game can be detected accurately and at an early stage with the opening instruction of the door frame 14 as an opportunity.

  In the third ball number determination process, whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed is confirmed by the 51 ball detection switch 91 and the 50 ball detection switch 90 provided in the supply passage 65. Not only based on the detection result of the sphere, but also by comparing the number of circulating spheres stored in the circulating sphere number memory 213c with the initial number of spheres stored in the initial sphere number memory 213d. As a result, whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed is confirmed based on the detection results of the spheres in the 51 sphere detection switch 91 and the 50 sphere detection switch 92, and the storage of the spheres in the actual supply passage 65. A plurality of methods including a method of judging the state and a method of using the number of circulating spheres counted based on the sphere discharged from the supply passage 65 and the sphere recovered again in the supply passage 65 Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a trouble or fraud that cannot be detected by one method can be detected by another method. Therefore, there is an effect that trouble and unsuccessfulness can be recognized more accurately and quickly.

  Further, in the third ball number determination process, when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is not changed. In addition, a process of comparing the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f with the value of the winning ball counter 213g is executed. Thus, when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, if the value of the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the value of the winning ball counter 213g do not match, It is possible to notify a winning error indicating that there has been an illegal act or trouble related to winning. Therefore, it is possible to quickly confirm troubles and fraudulent actions related to winning a prize, triggered by an instruction to open the door frame 14.

  After the process of S2405, based on the detection result of the photosensor 98, it is determined whether or not the door frame 14 is closed (S2406). Then, while it is not determined that the door frame 14 is closed (S2406: No), the process of S2406 is repeated.

  If it is determined by the process of S2406 that the door frame 14 has been closed (S2406: Yes), the error notification is canceled (S2407), and whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is unchanged. A fourth ball number determination process is performed in which the confirmation is performed based on the detection result of the spheres by the 51 sphere detection switch 91 and the 50 sphere detection switch 90 provided in the supply passage 65 (S2408). At this stage, it is confirmed whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed, and the result of detection of the balls by the 51 ball detection switch 91 and the 50 ball detection switch 90 provided in the supply passage 65 Since the game is not actually performed after the third ball number determination process is performed based on the ball, the ball is discharged based on the ball discharged from the supply passage 65 and the ball recovered again in the supply passage 65. This is because there is no change in the number of circulating spheres counted.

  Here, the details of the fourth ball number determination process (S2408) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the fourth ball number determination process.

  In the fourth ball number determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on (S2601). If the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. Whether or not the 50-ball detection switch 92 is on is determined (S2602). As a result of the process of S2601, if the 51-sphere detection switch 91 is not on but off (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S2605. In the process of S2605, as in the process of S2602, 50 is detected. It is determined whether or not the sphere detection switch 92 is on (S2605).

  If it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is turned on by the process of S2601 (S2601: Yes) and it is determined that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is turned on by the process of S2602 (S2602: Yes), the circulation ball It can be determined that the number is larger than 50 balls, that is, 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. Therefore, when all 50 balls that should have been stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it can be determined that 51 or more balls are stored in the supply passage 65. In some cases, it is determined that an illegal act such as illegally mixing balls in the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that there is a high possibility that a ball clogging has occurred in the supply passage 65, and this is reported as an over error. (S2603). Thereafter, the fourth ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  If it is determined that the 51-ball detection switch 91 is on by the process of S2601 (S2601: Yes) and it is determined that the 50-ball detection switch 92 is off by the process of S2602 (S2602: No), 50 balls There is a high possibility that at least one of the detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 is out of order. Therefore, in this case, it is notified as a switch error that there is a high possibility that at least one of the 50-ball detection switch 92 and the 51-ball detection switch 91 is out of order (S2604). Thereafter, the fourth ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  Furthermore, if it is determined that the 51 ball detection switch 91 is off by the process of S2601 (S2601: No), and it is determined that the 50 ball detection switch 92 is off by the process of S2605 (S2605: No), the circulation ball It can be determined that the number is less than 50, that is, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is less than 50. Therefore, when it can be determined that all the 50 balls that should be stored in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, it is determined that the 50 balls are stored in the supply passage 65. Then, it is determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble such as a predetermined number of balls not being supplied to the supply passage 65 has occurred, and this is notified as an under error (S2606). Thereafter, the fourth ball number determination process is terminated and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  On the other hand, when the 51 ball detection switch 91 is off (S2601: No) and the 50 ball detection switch 92 is on (S2605: Yes), a ball is stored at the position of the 51 ball detection switch 91 in the supply passage 65. This means that a sphere is stored at the position of the 50-ball detection switch 92 in the supply passage 65. Therefore, it is determined that a predetermined number of balls (50 balls) are stored in the supply passage 65, the fourth ball number determination process is terminated without notifying an error, and the process returns to the door frame opening process.

  As described above, by executing the fourth ball number determination process after the door frame 14 is closed, fraud and troubles are not solved while the door frame 14 is opened, It is possible to quickly notify that a trouble has occurred. Therefore, the hall personnel can continue to deal with fraud and troubles.

  Returning to FIG. 29, the description of the door frame opening process will be continued. After the fourth ball number determination process (S2408), it is determined whether various error notifications (over error notification, under error notification, switch error notification) have occurred in the fourth ball number determination process (S2408) (S2409). If there is no error notification (S2409: No), it is determined that a predetermined number (50 balls) of balls are correctly stored in the supply passage 65, and the initial ball number “50” is stored in the circulating ball number memory 213b. Then, the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the winning ball counter 213g are set to 0 (S2415), the door frame opening process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S2409 that various error notifications (over error notification, under error notification, switch error notification) have been made in the fourth ball number determination processing (S2408) (S2409: Yes), the hall personnel Opens the door frame 14 again, and the process proceeds to S2410 so that countermeasures against illegal acts and troubles are performed. From the detection result of the photosensor 95, the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view. It is determined whether it has been done (S2410). When the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S2410: Yes), a voltage is applied to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, the engagement rod 99a is contracted, and the door frame 14 is unlocked ( S2411).

  Thereafter, based on the detection result of the photosensor 98, it is determined whether or not the door frame 14 is closed (S2412). If it is determined that the door frame 14 is not closed (S2412: No), the process proceeds to S2412. Repeat the process.

  As a result of the process of S2410, when it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated clockwise in front view (S2410: No), or when the door frame 14 is determined to be closed as a result of the process of S2412 (S2412: Yes) determines whether or not the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S2413). While it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has not been operated (S2413: No), the processing of S2410 to S2413 is performed. Repeatedly. If it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S2413: Yes), the process exits the loop process of S2410 to S2413 and returns to the process of S2407.

  After various errors are notified by the loop processing in S2410 to S2413, the door frame 14 can be opened by executing control for driving the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99. Thereby, the hall personnel can open the door frame 14 after being notified of various errors, and can confirm whether or not a ball is clogged and remains in the game area or the like. In addition, while the loop processing in S2410 to S2413 is being performed, with the inner frame 12 opened, the lever 67c is pulled to extract the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 from the sphere extraction passage 67, and there is a problem with the sphere. It is possible to check whether or not there is a problem, or to replace another sphere with the supply passage 65. In this way, after the hall personnel perform a response to eliminate the error state, the hall personnel operates the error release button 120, and the process returns to S2407.

  When the process returns to S2407, the error notification is canceled (S2407), and the fourth ball number determination process (S2408) is executed again. In the fourth ball number determination process (S2408), when there is no error notification (S2409: No), it is determined that a predetermined number (50 balls) of balls are correctly stored in the supply passage 65, and the number of circulating balls “50”, which is the initial number of balls, is set in the memory 213b (S2414), then the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the winning ball counter 213g are set to 0 (S2415), and the door frame opening process is terminated. Return to the main process. On the other hand, when there is an error notification (S2409: Yes), the process again enters the loop processing of S2410 to S2413.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the settlement process (S1904) executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the settlement process. The settlement process is a process for performing settlement by transmitting the number of possessed balls at that time to the card sand apparatus 70 when the return button 75 of the card sand apparatus 70 is operated.

  In this settlement process, first, it is determined whether or not a settlement signal transmitted from the card sand apparatus 70 is received when the return button 75 of the card sand apparatus 70 is operated (S2701). If the settlement signal has not been received (S2701: No), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S2701 that a settlement signal has been received from the card sand device 70 (S2701: Yes), the firing control device 112 is instructed to stop firing the ball (S2702). Upon receiving the stop of the ball launch, the launch control device 112 opens the gate provided at the end 65b of the supply passage 65 and opens the gate to send the ball to the ball launch unit 66 from the supply passage 65. The ball launching operation by the ball launching unit 66 is stopped. Thereby, the launch of the sphere is stopped.

  Next, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the launch of the sphere was stopped by the process of S2702 (S2703). As a result, when it is determined that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the launch of the sphere has been stopped (S2703: No), the process of S2703 is repeatedly executed, and 30 seconds have elapsed since the launch of the sphere was stopped. If it is determined (S2703: Yes), the process repeats the process of S2703, executes the third ball number determination process described above with reference to FIG. 30 (S2704), and proceeds to the process of S2705.

  In the process of S2705, it is determined whether various error notifications (over error notification, under error notification, switch error notification) have occurred in the third ball number determination process (S2704) or the fourth ball number determination process (S2714) described later (S2705). ). If there is no error notification (S2705: No), it is determined that a predetermined number (50 balls) of balls are correctly stored in the supply passage 65, and the value of the possessed ball counter 213a is stored in the card sand device 70 (the number of possessed balls). ) Is notified (S2706). In the card sand apparatus 70, the number of possessed balls is converted into points at a predetermined exchange rate, and the converted points are cumulatively added to the saving data of the member card. Then, the member card storing the accumulated and added saving data is discharged from the card insertion slot 72.

  Thereafter, “50” which is the initial number of balls is set in the circulating ball number memory 213b (S2707), and then the possessed ball addition command counter 213f, the winning ball counter 213g, and the possessed ball counter 213a are set to 0 (S2708). ), The settlement process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that various error notifications (over error notification, under error notification, switch error notification) have been made through the processing of S2705 (S2705: Yes), the hall personnel reopen the door frame 14 again. Therefore, the process proceeds to S2709 so that an illegal action or trouble is dealt with, and it is determined from the detection result of the photosensor 95 whether the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S2709). . When the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S2709: Yes), a voltage is applied to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, the engagement rod 99a is contracted, and the door frame 14 is unlocked ( S2711).

  Then, based on the detection result of the photosensor 98, it is determined whether or not the door frame 14 is closed (S2711). If it is determined that the door frame 14 is not closed (S2711: No), the process proceeds to S2711. Repeat the process.

  As a result of the process of S2709, when it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated clockwise in front view (S2709: No), or when the door frame 14 is determined to be closed as a result of the process of S2711 (S2711: Yes) determines whether or not the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S2712). While it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has not been operated (S2712: No), the processing of S2709 to S2712 is performed. Repeatedly. If it is determined that the error release button 120 has been operated (S2712: Yes), the process exits the loop process of S2709 to S2712 and proceeds to the process of S2713.

  After various errors are notified by the loop processing in S2709 to S2712, the door frame 14 can be opened by executing control for driving the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99. Thereby, the hall personnel can open the door frame 14 after being notified of various errors, and can confirm whether or not a ball is clogged and remains in the game area or the like. Also, while the loop processing in S2709 to S2712 is being performed, with the inner frame 12 opened, the lever 67c is pulled to extract the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 from the sphere extraction passage 67, and there is a problem with the sphere. It is possible to check whether or not there is a problem, or to replace another sphere with the supply passage 65. In this way, after the hall personnel take action to eliminate the error state, the hall personnel operates the error release button 120, and the process proceeds to S2713.

  In the process of S2713, the error notification performed in the third ball number determination process (S2704) is canceled (S2713), and then the fourth ball number determination process described above with reference to FIG. 31 is executed (S2714). . Then, the process returns to S2705.

  Accordingly, in the fourth ball number determination process (S2714), when there is no error notification (S2705: No), it is determined that a predetermined number (50 balls) of balls are correctly stored in the supply passage 65, and S2706 to S2706. The process of S2708 is executed, the settlement process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an error notification (S2714: Yes), the loop processing of S2709 to S2712 is entered again.

  In this way, when adjusting the possessed ball, the third ball number determination process is executed after 30 seconds have elapsed since the ball was stopped and the ball was stopped, and stored in the supply passage 65. The number of spheres is determined to check whether there is any change in the number of circulating spheres.

  In a conventional in-machine circulation pachinko machine, the number of balls stored in the machine is confirmed only when the power is turned on in a state where the balls are reliably stored in the supply passage 65. The number of balls stored in the plane is checked only when the power is turned on. Basically, the balls are dispersed in various places (launch rail, ball guide passage, front area of the game board, etc.) during the game. This is because it is difficult to accurately determine the number of spheres stored in the aircraft. However, if a trouble occurs or an illegal act is performed during the game, it cannot be recognized at an early stage.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when adjusting the possessed sphere, the launch of the sphere is stopped, and 30 seconds after the launch of the sphere is stopped, the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 is stopped. Since the number of circulating spheres is checked to determine whether there is any change in the number of balls, when all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are in the state of being stored in the supply passage 65, It is possible to confirm whether or not the number of spheres present is a predetermined number. If it is confirmed that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is different from the predetermined number (50 balls in the present embodiment), it may cause troubles such as clogging of balls during the game or illegally. It can be recognized that an illegal act such as a ball is mixed. Therefore, troubles and frauds that occur during the game can be detected accurately and at an early stage with the adjustment of the possessed ball. In addition, when trouble or fraudulent behavior that occurs during the game is discovered, the number of possessed balls is not notified to the card sanding device 70 until the trouble or fraudulent behavior is resolved. It is possible to suppress that points corresponding to the number of possessed balls obtained by fraudulent action are accumulated and added to the saved data of the membership card, or points corresponding to the correct number of possessed balls are not accumulated due to trouble.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the jackpot end ball determination process (S1905) executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the big hit end sphere determination process. The jackpot end sphere determination process is a process for determining the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 when the ending effect in the jackpot effect is performed, and checking whether there is any change in the number of circulating balls.

  In this jackpot end ball determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball determination flag 213h is on (S2801). If the ball determination flag 213h is not on but off (S2801: No), it is not the start timing of the ending effect in the jackpot effect, so the jackpot end ball determination process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball determination flag 213h is on as a result of the processing of S2801 (S2801: Yes), it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect in the jackpot effect, and the launch control device determines that the ball is stopped. 112 is instructed (S2802). Upon receiving the stop of the ball launch, the launch control device 112 opens the gate provided at the end 65b of the supply passage 65 and opens the gate to send the ball to the ball launch unit 66 from the supply passage 65. The ball launching operation by the ball launching unit 66 is stopped. Thereby, the launch of the sphere is stopped.

  Next, it is determined whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed since the launch of the sphere was stopped by the processing of S2802 (S2803). As a result, when it is determined that 30 seconds have not elapsed since the ball was stopped (S2803: No), the process of S2803 is repeatedly executed, and 30 seconds have elapsed since the ball was stopped. If it is determined (S2803: Yes), the process repeats the process in S2803, executes the third ball number determination process described above with reference to FIG. 30 (S2804), and proceeds to the process in S2805.

  In the process of S2805, it is determined whether various error notifications (over error notification, under error notification, switch error notification) have occurred in the third ball number determination process (S2804) or the fourth ball number determination process (S2814) described later (S2805). ). If there is no error notification (S2805: No), it is determined that a predetermined number (50 balls) of balls are correctly stored in the supply passage 65, and the ball determination flag is set to OFF in order to continue the game. Next, “50”, which is the initial number of balls, is set in the circulating ball number memory 213b (S2807), and the possessed ball addition command counter 213f and the winning ball counter 213g are set to 0 (S2808). ), The jackpot end ball determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that various error notifications (over error notification, under error notification, switch error notification) have been made by the processing of S2805 (S2805: Yes), the hall personnel reopen the door frame 14 again. Thus, the process proceeds to S2809 so that an illegal action or trouble is dealt with, and it is determined from the detection result of the photosensor 95 whether the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S2809). . When the cylinder lock 21a is rotated clockwise in front view (S2809: Yes), a voltage is applied to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, the engagement rod 99a is contracted, and the door frame 14 is unlocked ( S2811).

  Thereafter, based on the detection result of the photosensor 98, it is determined whether or not the door frame 14 is closed (S2811). If it is determined that the door frame 14 is not closed (S2811: No), the process proceeds to S2811. Repeat the process.

  As a result of the process of S2809, when it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated clockwise in front view (S2809: No), or when the door frame 14 is determined to be closed as a result of the process of S2811 (S2811: Yes) determines whether or not the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S2812). While it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has not been operated (S2812: No), the processing of S2809 to S2812 Repeatedly. If it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S2812: Yes), the process exits the loop process of S2809 to S2812, and proceeds to the process of S2813.

  After various errors are notified by the loop processing in S2809 to S2812, the door frame 14 can be opened by executing control for driving the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99. Thereby, the hall personnel can open the door frame 14 after being notified of various errors, and can confirm whether or not a ball is clogged and remains in the game area or the like. Also, while the loop processing in S2809 to S2812 is being performed, with the inner frame 12 opened, the lever 67c is pulled to extract the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 from the sphere extraction passage 67, and there is a problem with the sphere. It is possible to check whether or not there is a problem, or to replace another sphere with the supply passage 65. In this way, after the hall personnel take action to eliminate the error state, the hall personnel operates the error release button 120, and the process proceeds to S2813.

  In the process of S2813, the error notification performed in the third ball number determination process (S2804) is canceled (S2813), and then the fourth ball number determination process described above with reference to FIG. 31 is executed (S2814). . Then, the process returns to S2805.

  Thereby, in the fourth ball number determination process (S2814), when there is no error notification (S2805: No), it is determined that a predetermined number (50 balls) of balls are correctly stored in the supply passage 65, and S2806 ~ The process of S2808 is executed, the jackpot end ball determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an error notification (S2814: Yes), the loop processing of S2809 to S2812 is entered again.

  Thus, when the ending effect in the jackpot effect is performed, the third ball number determination process is executed after 30 seconds have elapsed since the ball was stopped and the ball was stopped, and the supply passage 65 The number of spheres stored in is determined to check whether there is any change in the number of circulating spheres.

  In a conventional in-machine circulation pachinko machine, the number of balls stored in the machine is confirmed only when the power is turned on in a state where the balls are reliably stored in the supply passage 65. The number of balls stored in the plane is checked only when the power is turned on. Basically, the balls are dispersed in various places (launch rail, ball guide passage, front area of the game board, etc.) during the game. This is because it is difficult to accurately determine the number of spheres stored in the aircraft. However, if a trouble occurs or an illegal act is performed during the game, it cannot be recognized at an early stage.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the ending effect in the jackpot effect is performed, the launch of the ball is stopped, and after 30 seconds have passed since the launch of the ball is stopped, the ball is stored in the supply passage 65. Since the number of spheres is determined to check whether there is any change in the number of circulated spheres, when all the spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are stored in the supply passage 65, they are stored in the supply passage 65. It is possible to confirm whether or not a predetermined number of spheres are prepared. If it is confirmed that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is different from the predetermined number (50 balls in the present embodiment), it may cause troubles such as clogging of balls during the game or illegally. It can be recognized that an illegal act such as a ball is mixed. Therefore, troubles and frauds that occur during the game can be detected accurately and at an early stage with the adjustment of the possessed ball. In addition, if a trouble or fraud that occurs during a game is discovered, the ball will remain stopped until the trouble or fraud is resolved. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, confirming whether or not the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed without stopping the firing of the ball involves stopping the firing of the ball. Since it is executed at the timing when the ending effect that takes a break is performed, it is possible to suppress the player's dissatisfaction due to the stop of the launch.

  Note that, as described above, it is desirable to perform the jackpot ending effect for at least 31 seconds. In order to confirm the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65, it is necessary to stop the ball from firing for at least 30 seconds after the launch is stopped. By giving, the player can be released from the dissatisfaction that the ball cannot fire. In addition, in the ending effect, some game effect is displayed to indicate the subsequent game state to the player, or a notice effect that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery performed on the ball held at that time You may make it perform. Thereby, a player can be released from the boring feeling by ending production becoming long.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the normal time ball determination process (S1906) executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the normal time ball determination process. The normal time ball determination process is a process for determining whether there is any change in the number of circulating balls by determining the number of balls in the supply passage 65 when the balls are continuously fired.

  In the normal time ball determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball collection time counting counter 213e is less than 29390 (S2901). As a result, when the ball collection time counting counter 213e is less than 29390 (S2901: Yes), the time since the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launch unit 66 is continuously fired. Since the ball firing period of 610 milliseconds is exceeded, the under-state counter 213i and the over-state counter 213j are initialized to 0, the normal time ball determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2901, when it is determined that the ball collection time counting counter 213e is 29390 or more (S2901: No), the time from when the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launching unit 66 is This means that it is 610 milliseconds or less, which is the ball firing period when balls are fired continuously.

  Therefore, in this case, in order to measure the time during which spheres are not continuously detected at the position where the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 of the supply passage 65 is provided in 610 milliseconds after the sphere is launched, First, it is determined whether or not the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is off (S2902). If the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is ON (S2902: No), since the sphere is detected at the position where the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is provided in the supply passage 65, the under-state counter 213i is set to 0. (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2907.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2902, when it is determined that the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is OFF (S2902: Yes), a sphere is detected at the position where the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is provided in the supply passage 65. Therefore, 1 is added to the under-state counter 213i (S2904). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the under-state counter 213i after adding 1 is 305 or more, which is half of the period when the ball is continuously fired (S2905), and the value of the under-state counter 213i Is 305 or more (S2905: Yes), the process proceeds to S2906.

  Here, even during the game, that is, while the ball is being launched toward the game area, as described above, the supply passage 65 has at least a predetermined number A of balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls). ) Is stored. The minimum number of sphere detection switch 90 is a predetermined number A (that is, tenth) pieces from the end 65b side when spheres are stored one by one in order from the end 65b in the supply passage 65. It is provided at a position where the ball is fastened.

  When the spheres in the supply passage 65 are sent to the sphere launch unit 66, the stored spheres move toward the end portion 65b. In the supply passage 65, the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is provided except for the movement period. At a given position, the sphere is always stored, and the output of the minimum number sphere detection switch 90 is turned on. Accordingly, if the minimum number ball detection switch 90 has been turned off for a long time for 610 milliseconds after the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launch unit 66, the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is provided. At least the ball is not stored in the given position, and the ball launched into the front area of the game board 13 can be collected in the supply passage 65 because the front area of the game board 13 is clogged. It can be judged that there is a high possibility that no trouble has occurred.

  Therefore, when the under-state counter 213i is equal to or greater than 305, the position where the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is provided during the time 610 milliseconds after the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launching unit 66. This means that at least the ball has not been continuously present for 305 milliseconds, and in this case, the ball is not stored at the position where the minimum number ball detection switch 90 is provided, and the front of the game board 13 is not stored. It can be determined that there is a high possibility that a trouble has occurred in which the balls launched into the front area of the game board 13 cannot be collected in the supply passage 65 due to the occurrence of clogged balls. Therefore, in the process of S2906, an under error is notified (S2906). As a result, all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 are not stored in the supply passage 65, and even while the game is being played by the player, to some extent fraud and trouble related to the under error. Can be notified. Therefore, when a trouble or the like occurs during the game, it can be recognized at an early stage by the player or the person concerned with the hall. After the process of S2906, the normal time ball determination process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2904, when it is determined that the value of the under state counter 213i is less than 305 (S2904: No), the process proceeds to S2907.

  In S2907, in order to measure the time during which spheres are continuously detected at the position where the 51 sphere detection switch 91 is provided in the supply passage 65 within 610 milliseconds after the sphere is launched, It is determined whether or not the sphere detection switch 91 is on (S2907). If the 51 ball detection switch 91 is off (S2907: No), the over state counter 213i is initialized to 0 because no ball is detected at the position where the 51 ball detection switch 91 is provided in the supply passage 65. (S2908), the normal time ball determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2907 that the 51 ball detection switch 91 is on (S2907: Yes), no ball is detected at the position where the 51 ball detection switch 91 of the supply passage 65 is provided. Then, 1 is added to the over state counter 213j (S2909). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the over-state counter 213j after adding 1 is 305 or more, which is half the period when the ball is continuously fired (S2910), and the value of the over-state counter 213j Is 305 or more (S2910: Yes), the process proceeds to S2911.

  Here, during the game, that is, while the ball is being launched toward the game area, the ball does not stop at the position where the 51 ball detection switch 91 of the supply passage 65 exists, and at that position, the foul ball The balls collected as winning balls or out balls only pass toward the end 65b of the supply passage 65. Therefore, during the game, the output of the 51 ball detection switch 91 is turned off except when a ball passes. Accordingly, if the 51 ball detection switch 91 has been on for a long time for 610 milliseconds after the ball in the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launch unit 66, the 51 ball detection switch 91 is provided. It is possible to determine that there is a high possibility that a ball is also stored at the position, and that an illegal act such as illegally mixing the ball into the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that a clogged ball has occurred inside the supply passage 65.

  Therefore, when the over-state counter 213j is 305 or more, the 51-ball detection switch 91 is provided at the position where the ball from the supply passage 65 is sent to the ball launching unit 66 within 610 milliseconds. This means that at least the sphere has been continuously present for 305 milliseconds. In this case, the sphere is stored at the position where the 51 sphere detection switch 91 is provided, and the position where the 51 sphere detection switch 91 is provided. Further, it is possible to determine that there is a high possibility that a ball is stored and an illegal act such as illegally mixing the ball into the pachinko machine 10 has been performed, or that the ball is clogged in the supply passage 65. Therefore, in the process of S2911, an over error is notified (S2911). As a result, all the balls that circulate in the pachinko machine 10 are not stored in the supply passage 65, and even if the game is being performed by the player, some illegal acts or troubles related to over error are caused to some extent. Can be notified. Therefore, when a trouble or the like occurs during the game, it can be recognized at an early stage by the player or the person concerned with the hall. After the process of S2911, the normal time ball determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Further, in the process of S2910, when it is determined that the value of the over state counter 213j is less than 305 (S2910: No), the normal time ball determination process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the elapsed time from the last launch of the sphere is counted, and the time is counted, for example, 30 seconds (that is, the sphere is sent from the supply passage 65 to the sphere). Supply passage 65 when a sufficient time has elapsed since it has been supplied to launching unit 66 and then fired by ball launching unit 66, flowing down the front area of game board 13 and returning to supply passage 65 again. Check the number of spheres stored in In addition, when the return button 75 of the card sand device 77 is operated and the adjustment processing of the possessed ball for the player to finish the game is executed, the supply passage is also 30 seconds after the ball is stopped from firing. The number of spheres stored in 65 is confirmed, and it is confirmed whether or not there is any change in the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, when all the round effects in the single hit of the pachinko machine 10 (the effect of opening the specific winning opening 5a) are finished and the ending effect is started, the ball is stopped to fire at the start, Even after 30 seconds have elapsed from the stop of the launch of the sphere, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is confirmed, and it is confirmed whether there is any change in the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10. If the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is abnormal as a result of these confirmations, some trouble has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 or some illegal act has been performed on the pachinko machine 10. This is reported as an error.

  In a conventional in-machine circulation pachinko machine, the number of balls stored in the machine is confirmed only when the power is turned on in a state where the balls are reliably stored in the supply passage 65. The number of balls stored in the plane is checked only when the power is turned on. Basically, the balls are dispersed in various places (launch rail, ball guide passage, front area of the game board, etc.) during the game. This is because it is difficult to accurately determine the number of spheres stored in the aircraft. However, if a trouble occurs or an illegal act is performed during the game, it cannot be recognized at an early stage.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, not only immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, but when the player stops the game temporarily due to a break or the like, or after the game ends, and all round effects in one jackpot end When the player takes a break, the number of balls stored in the plane can be confirmed, so that troubles and frauds occurring during the game can be confirmed early. Further, when it is determined that a sufficient time has elapsed until a ball is launched by the ball launching unit 66, flows down the front area of the game board 13, and returns to the supply passage 65 again, it is stored in the supply passage 65. Since the number of spheres is confirmed, if no trouble or fraud has occurred, all the spheres circulating in the plane should be stored in the supply passage 65 at that time. Therefore, by confirming the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 at that time, it is possible to accurately determine the trouble or fraud that has occurred during the game.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 14 is locked by the electronic lock 99, the unlocking can be controlled electronically. Specifically, when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is turned clockwise during the game, the counting device 111 stops the ball firing in the ball launching unit 66, and the ball fired before the stop is played. The solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99 is driven after a sufficient time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds after the ball has stopped firing) to flow down the front area of the board 13 and be collected again in the supply passage 65. Thus, the engagement state between the engagement rod 99 of the electronic lock 99 and the protruding portion 96a of the door frame 14 can be released, and the door frame 14 can be unlocked.

  Here, if the door frame 14 is unlocked immediately when the key inserted into the keyhole 21b is rotated clockwise as in the conventional game, the game board is opened when the door frame 14 is opened. There is a high possibility that the sphere is flowing down the front region of 13, and the cheating person who unlocked the door frame 14 to perform cheating can easily touch the sphere. Therefore, a fraudster may easily perform a fraud such as extracting a ball flowing down the front area of the game board 13 and replacing it with a fraudulent ball or oiling the ball. There is.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the key is inserted into the key hole 21b during the game and turned clockwise, so that even if the unlocking of the door frame 14 is instructed, While the ball thus made flows down the front surface of the game board 13, at least the door frame 14 can be kept closed. Therefore, when the door frame 14 is opened, the ball can be stored in the supply passage 65 covered with the cover, so that the player can not touch the ball built in the pachinko machine 14, It is possible to prevent cheating.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the possessed ball counter 213a that counts the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game is updated as follows. That is, in the update of the possessed ball counter 213a when a ball is launched toward the game board 13 and one possessed ball is consumed, in the first embodiment, the launched ball passes through the ball guide passage 60 and plays a game. When it is detected by the gaming ball detection switch 68a that the ball has been guided to the top of the board 13, the possessed ball counter 213a is decremented by 1 (S2310 in FIG. 28). That is, in the first embodiment, the possessed ball counter 213a is decremented by 1, assuming that the ball is consumed when the ball is guided to the top of the game board 13.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the ball is consumed when the ball feed detection switch 94 detects that the ball has been supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (that the ball has been fed). 1 is subtracted from the possessed ball counter 213a.

  In the first embodiment, the ball that was launched when the power interruption occurred due to a power failure, noise, or the like, or the ball that was about to be launched at the time of the power interruption was not processed for winning etc. due to the power interruption. In the case where the possessed ball counter 213a is not used as a game, no consideration is given to the updating of the possessed ball counter 213a. May be subtracted by 1.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when a power failure is detected after supplying a ball to the ball launch unit 66 and before launching the ball, the supplied ball is not fired. Retain in ball launch unit 66. Then, in the start-up process executed by the counting device 111 when the power is turned on again, the ball launching unit 66 is unconditionally (regardless of whether or not the ball is retained in the ball launching unit 66). To drive. After that, when a ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48, the supplied ball is changed to the ball launch unit 66 immediately before the power is turned off. It means that the ball is kept in the firing unit 66 and is not used in the game (the ball has not been consumed), so the value of the possessed ball counter 213a that has been decremented by the supply of the ball is incremented by one.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the power interruption is detected, the balls that have been won to the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a thereafter are temporarily positioned upstream of the winning ball detection switch 47. In addition, the ball that has entered the out port 6 after the power-off is detected is temporarily stopped upstream of the out ball detection switch 48. Then, in the start-up process executed by the counting device 111 when the power is turned on again, the ball stopped upstream from the winning ball detection switch 47 is caused to flow down, and the winning ball detection switch 47 causes the ball to flow down. Each time is detected, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a is incremented by 1 assuming that the ball has not been used in the game. In addition, in the start-up process, the ball stopped upstream from the out ball detection switch 48 is caused to flow down, and each time the ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 48, the ball is not used in the game. As a result, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a is incremented by one.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the circulation of the circulating ball becomes impossible due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging, the player can temporarily stop the progress of the game (for example, the progress of the big hit). could not. In contrast, in the second embodiment, the all-sleep button 301 is installed in the pachinko machine 10 that can be operated by the player during the game, and a serious error such as a ball clogging occurs. When is operated, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 35 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, an all sleep button 301 is provided on the left side of the overhanging portion provided at the lower part of the door frame 14 (on the left side of the operation unit 23). In other words, the all sleep button 301 is provided at a position where the player can operate.

  This all-sleep button 301 is a button for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and when there is a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball, the all-sleep button 301 When 301 is operated, the main controller 110 temporarily stops the progress of the game.

  Whether there is an abnormality such as a clogged ball is determined by an error signal transmitted from the counting device 111 to the main control device 110. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the counting device 111 checks the number of balls circulating while the player is playing, and is generated during the game. The troubles and fraudulent actions that were made are confirmed early. In the second embodiment, when there is an abnormality in the number of circulated balls by the counting device 111 and it is determined that there is a trouble or an illegal act, the counting device 111 sends an error signal to the main control device 110. Send. If the counting device 111 determines that the trouble or fraud has been resolved, the counting device 111 transmits an error cancellation signal to the main control device 110.

  When the main controller 110 detects that the all-sleep button 301 has been operated between the time when the error signal is received from the counting device 111 and the time when the error release signal is received from the counting device 111, the main control device 110 causes the counting device 111 to On the other hand, after transmitting the all-sleep command, loop processing is executed without performing processing related to game control. By this loop processing, main controller 110 temporarily stops control of the game.

  Further, when receiving the all-sleep command, the counting device 111 stops the launch of the sphere and executes a loop process. Therefore, if an all-sleep button 301 is operated when an abnormality is recognized based on a signal from the counting device 111, the main control device 110 temporarily stops game control, and the counting device 111 fires a ball. Since the game is stopped, the progress of the game itself is temporarily stopped.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, when there is a situation in which it is impossible to launch a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball, the player can operate the all sleep button 301 to play a game. The player can temporarily stop the progress of the game by operating the all-sleep button 301.

  In a general pachinko machine where a player launches a ball to the game board while loading the ball, even if a ball clog occurs, unless the ball clogging is a part involved in the ball launch, as long as the ball is loaded, You can continue to fire the ball to the game board and continue the game. However, in the in-flight circulation type gaming machine as in this embodiment, since the player cannot freely load the balls, when a ball clogging occurs, the regular number of balls no longer circulate, and the ball launch itself May not be as intended by the player. If this happens, for example, when the player is in an advantageous state such as a jackpot, the advantageous state (bonus) will end with the passage of time unless the progress of the game stops. The player will be penalized. In addition, there is a fear that such a disadvantage will occur, and there is a risk that the player will not be able to play the game with the in-flight circulation type gaming machine with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player operates the all sleep button 301 when there is a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. The progress of the game can be temporarily stopped according to the player's intention. Therefore, it can suppress that a player suffers a disadvantage. In addition, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 enables the operation of the all sleep button 301 only when there is a situation in which it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. In other words, the player can operate the all-sleep button 301 to temporarily stop the progress of the game in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. Limited to cases. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game. Therefore, when a game is played without any problem, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player accidentally operates the all sleep button 301 and the progress of the game is temporarily stopped. In addition, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game temporarily while the game can be performed by the fraudster and to prevent any fraudulent activity from being performed while the game is stopped.

  When the all sleep button 301 is operated and the control of the game is temporarily stopped, the main control device 110 not only performs the loop processing but also the sound lamp control device 113 before executing the loop processing. Also, an all sleep command is transmitted.

  When the audio lamp device 113 receives the all-sleep command, the audio output device 226 outputs an audio message indicating that the game has been temporarily stopped by the player, or the lamp display device 227 (lighting units 32 to 36). Notification is made by lighting or blinking, or by controlling the display control device 114 to display on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, the hall clerk can be notified that the player has operated the all-sleep command to temporarily stop the game in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the store clerk can confirm why the game has been stopped by the player who has temporarily stopped the game, and can solve the problem (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 in some cases. Further, by notifying that the game has been temporarily stopped, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the player intends to operate the all-sleep button 301 in order to perform mischief or some illegal act.

  Here, while the main control device 110 temporarily stops control of the game, the main control device 110 receives commands related to the progress of the game (variation pattern command, stop type command, fanfare command, round number command, ending) Command or the like) is not transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, while the main control device 110 temporarily stops the control of the game, the effects related to the game including the variation effect and the jackpot effect are the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (lighting units 32-36). This is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 are stopped, so that not only the above-mentioned notification but also the stop of the execution of the effects indicates that the game has been temporarily stopped. A store clerk can be easily recognized.

  The main controller 110 may notify the hall computer installed in the hall when the progress of the game is stopped by operating the all sleep button 301. And in a hall computer, you may make it alert | report that the progress of a game was stopped. This also makes it possible to easily notify the hall clerk that the progress of the game has been stopped.

  In addition, regardless of the progress of the game, the hall computer may be notified that the all sleep button 301 has been operated, and the operation status of the all sleep button 301 may be notified by the hall computer. For example, when the all sleep button 301 is operated a predetermined number of times or more, the fact may be notified by the hall computer. As a result, the clerk in the hall can grasp the operation status of the all-sleep button 301, so that when there is a person who uses the all-sleep button 301 to perform an illegal act, the person can be easily found.

  Further, the all sleep button 301 may be configured to recognize that the all sleep button 301 is pressed only when the button is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds). Thereby, even if the player touches the all-sleep button 301 by mistake, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped.

  The all-sleep button 301 may be formed of a material that incorporates an LED and transmits light emitted from the LED. Alternatively, in the pachinko machine 10, LEDs may be disposed on the outer periphery of the all sleep button 301 or at a position adjacent to the all sleep button 301. The main control device 110 is in a period during which the operation of the all sleep button 301 is valid, that is, from the time when the error signal is received from the counting device 111 until the time when the error canceling signal is received from the counting device 111. Alternatively, the LED may be turned on during a period in which it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Thereby, the player can easily grasp whether or not the operation of the all sleep button 301 is in a valid period by looking at the lighting state of the LED.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the winning ball side stopping device 310 and the out ball side stopping device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 36 is a rear view showing the configuration of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a winning ball side stopping device 310 is disposed in the middle of the discharge port 41b and upstream of the winning ball detection switch 47 (upward in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10). Yes. In addition, an out ball side stopping device 320 is connected to the out port 6, and an out ball detecting switch 48 is disposed on the downstream side of the out ball side stopping device 320 (on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the back).

  As described in the first embodiment, the discharge port 41b is a ball that has won the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a, and is then collected by the collecting passage 41a, and at one location downstream. This is a port for discharging the balls assembled to the discharge passage 42a. In the second embodiment, the balls that have won the general winning opening 3, the starting winning opening 4, and the specific winning opening 5a pass through the winning stop device 310 when entering the discharge opening 41b. Then, the ball that has passed the ball-side stop device 310 is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47, and then discharged to the discharge passage 42a.

  Further, the ball that has entered the out port 6 passes through the out side stopping device 320. Then, the sphere that has passed through the out-side stopping device 320 is detected by the out-sphere detecting switch 48 and then discharged to the discharge passage 42a.

  When it is detected that a power interruption due to a power failure or the like is detected, the winning ball side stopping device 310 receives a ball that has been won in the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a thereafter. It is an apparatus for temporarily stopping at the upstream side of 47. In addition, when it is detected that a power interruption has occurred due to a power failure or the like, the out-out side stop device 310 temporarily stores a ball that has entered the out-out port 6 after that on the upstream side of the out-ball detection switch 48. It is a device for stopping.

  If a ball flowing down the game board 30 or a ball fired on the game board 30 is present when the power is cut off, the ball enters the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a. A general winning switch 44 for detecting a ball won in the general winning opening 3, a start winning switch 45 for detecting a ball winning in the starting winning opening 4, and a specific winning switch 46 for detecting a ball won in the specific winning opening 5a. There is a possibility that it cannot operate normally. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, when the occurrence of power interruption is detected, the detection of a ball in the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, and the specific winning switch 46 is not confirmed, and a winning ball accompanying winning is not performed. ing. That is, a ball that is flowing down the game board 30 or a ball that is launched to the game board 30 that is present when a power interruption occurs can be regarded as a ball that has not been used in the game.

  On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the winning ball detection switch 47 that detects the balls that have won the various winning holes 3, 4, and 5a and the out ball detection switch 48 that detects the balls that have entered the out port 6 are also normal. It may be in a state where it cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, even if a ball enters the various winning holes 3, 4, 5a and the out port 6 after the power is cut off, there is a possibility that the inserted ball cannot be detected. . Therefore, after the power is cut off, there is a possibility that the number of balls not used in the game cannot be recognized correctly.

  Further, the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game is determined by the counting device 111 using the possessed ball counter 213a when the ball is launched into the game area (in this embodiment, the ball is sent to the launch unit 66). 1 is subtracted at the stage of supplying. As described above, the number of balls that are flowing down the game board 30 when the power is cut off, or balls that are fired on the game board 30, that is, the number of balls that are not used in the game, are correctly recognized after the power is turned off. Can not. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 as in the first embodiment, when a ball is launched into the game area, the number of balls that are not used in the game even if the ball is not used in the game due to power interruption. Can not be added to the possessed ball counter 213a, and there is a possibility that the balls that have not been used in the game may be decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a, causing a disadvantage to the player.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 10 circulates balls in the pachinko machine 10 and uses them for games, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the supply passage 65 in order to monitor the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10. The number of spheres is counted as a circulation sphere number using the circulation sphere number memory 213c. The circulating ball number memory 213c is incremented by 1 as a ball returned to the supply passage 65 when a ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48. However, as described above, when a power interruption occurs, a winning ball detection switch 47 that detects a ball that has won a prize in each of the winning holes 3, 4, and 5a, or an out ball detection switch 48 that detects a ball that has entered a ball in the out hole 6. However, there is a risk that it may not operate normally. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 as in the first embodiment, when the power is cut off, the ball flowing down the game board 30 or the ball launched to the game board 30 is the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball. There was a possibility that the number of circulating spheres could not be correctly counted by the circulating sphere number memory 213c without being detected by the detection switch 48. Therefore, although the predetermined number of balls are stored in the supply passage 65, the circulating ball number memory 213c cannot correctly count the circulating ball number, and thus there is a possibility that an error is notified.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, the balls that have entered the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a are stopped on the winning ball side provided on the upstream side of the winning ball detection switch 47. The sphere stopped at the device 310 and entering the out port 6 is stopped at the out sphere side stopping device 320 provided on the upstream side of the out sphere detection switch 48. As a result, a ball that is flowing down the game board 30 when a power interruption occurs, or a ball that has been fired on the game board 30, that is, a ball that has not been used in the game, The vehicle is stopped at either one of the stop devices 320.

  When the power is turned on again, the ball stopped on the winning ball side stopping device 310 is caused to flow down, and the winning ball detection switch 47 is made to detect the flowed down ball. In addition, when the power is turned on again, the sphere stopped by the out sphere side stopping device 320 is caused to flow down, and the sphere that has been caused to flow down is detected by the out sphere detection switch 48. The winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 can normally detect the ball when the power is turned on again. Accordingly, it is possible to correctly recognize the number of balls flowing down the game board 30 when the power is cut off or balls launched to the game board 30, that is, balls not used in the game. Therefore, by adding the number of balls to the possessed ball counter 213a, it is possible to prevent the balls not used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a. Therefore, the player's profit can be protected.

  Further, by this method, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 (by adding the number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 to the circulation ball number memory 213c ( The number of circulating spheres) can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error from being notified even though a predetermined number of balls are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, an internal configuration of the out ball side stopping device 320 will be described. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the internal configuration of the out-ball side stopping device 320. FIG. 37 (a) shows the state of the out-ball side stopping device 320 at the normal time when the game is being performed. b) shows the state of the out ball side stopping device 320 when the power is cut off, and (c) shows the out when the power is turned on again and the ball stopped by the out ball side stopping device 320 flows down. The state of the ball side stopping device 320 is shown. In addition, since the detailed structure of the winning ball side stopping device 310 is the same as that of the out ball side stopping device 320, illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  The out ball side stopping device 320 has two flow paths 323 and 324, and one of the flow paths 323 (the flow path on the right side in FIG. 37) flows down without stopping the sphere. It is a flow path for discharging to the outside of the side stopping device 320. The other flow path 324 (the flow path on the left side in FIG. 37) temporarily stops the sphere and then discharges the stopped sphere from the out-ball-side stopping device 320 to the outside. Road.

  The out ball side stopping device 320 includes a ball sorting plate 321 on the upstream side in the flow path, and a ball holding plate 322 on the downstream side in the flow path of the sphere. The winning ball side stopping device 310 also includes a ball sorting plate 311 and a ball stopping plate 312 (see FIG. 36), and the ball sorting plate 321 and the ball stopping plate of the out ball side stopping device 320, respectively. This corresponds to 322.

  The ball distribution plate 321 is a plate that distributes the sphere that has flowed into the out-ball side stopping device 320 with respect to the two flow paths 323 and 324 described above. In addition, the ball stop plate 322 is a plate for stopping the ball that has flowed down the flow path 324. Both the ball distribution plate 321 and the ball stop plate 322 are configured such that their positions are changed by a motor.

  When a game is normally performed, the ball sorting plate 321 is arranged at a position where the balls are distributed to the flow path 323 as shown in FIG. At this time, the ball stop plate 322 is disposed at a position that does not block the flow path of the sphere flowing down the flow path 323 (here, the position where the sphere flowing down the flow path 324 is stopped). As a result, the sphere that has flowed into the out-ball side stopping device 320 passes through the flow path 323 and is directly discharged out of the out-ball side stopping device 320. The sphere discharged from the out sphere side stopping device 320 is detected by an out sphere detection switch 48 provided on the downstream side of the out sphere side stopping device 320.

  On the other hand, when the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the ball distribution plate 321 is arranged at a position where the sphere is distributed to the flow path 324, and further flows down the flow path 324. A ball stop plate 322 is disposed at a position where the ball is stopped. Thereby, after the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, the ball that has flowed into the out ball side stopping device 320 through the out port 6 is stopped inside the out ball side stopping device 320 by the ball stopping plate 322. The state of FIG. 37 (b) continues even after the power supply is completely turned off. In other words, the ball that has stopped at the out-ball-side stopping device 320 due to the power being cut off continues to be stopped while the power is kept off.

  Then, when the power is turned on again, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the position of the ball stop plate 322 is moved to a position where the stopped ball flows down. As a result, the sphere that has stopped inside the out ball side stopping device 320 with the occurrence of the power interruption is discharged out of the out ball side stopping device 320. The sphere discharged from the out sphere side stopping device 320 is detected by the out sphere detection switch 48. Thereafter, when all the balls that have been stopped are discharged out of the out-ball-side stopping device 320, the ball sorting plate 321 and the ball stopping plate 322 are moved to the positions shown in FIG. 37 (a). Then, normal game is started.

  Thereby, when the occurrence of power interruption is detected, the ball that has entered the out port 6 after that can be stopped by the out ball side stopping device 320 provided on the upstream side of the out ball detecting switch 48. In addition, the ball distribution plate 311 and the ball stop plate 312 of the winning ball side stop device 310 are operated in the same manner as the ball distribution plate 321 and the ball stop plate 322 of the out ball side stop device 320. Therefore, the balls that have entered the various winning openings 3, 4 and 5a can be stopped by the winning ball side stopping device 310 provided on the upstream side of the winning ball detection switch 47.

  When the power is turned on again, the sphere stopped by the out sphere side stopping device 320 can be caused to flow down, and the sphere that has been allowed to flow down can be detected by the out sphere detection switch 48. Further, the ball stopped on the winning ball side stopping device 310 can be caused to flow down, and the ball that has been allowed to flow down can be detected by the winning ball detection switch 47. Therefore, the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 can normally detect the ball when the power is turned on again.

  Therefore, it is possible to correctly recognize the number of balls flowing down the game board 30 when the power interruption occurs, or balls fired on the game board 30, that is, the number of balls not used in the game. Therefore, by adding the number of balls to the possessed ball counter 213a, it is possible to prevent the balls not used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a. As a result, the player's profit can be protected.

  Further, by this method, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 (by adding the number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 to the circulation ball number memory 213c ( The number of circulating spheres) can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error from being notified even though a predetermined number of balls are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that an error flag 203c is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and an all sleep button 301 is provided in the main control device. The main control device 110 receives an error signal and an error cancellation signal from the counting device 111. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  The error flag 203c is a flag indicating that it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Indicates that it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire, and if it is off, indicates that it is in a situation other than that. The error flag 203c is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 203 (S1613 in FIG. 19).

  Here, as in the first embodiment, the counting device 111 confirms the number of balls that are circulating while the player is playing a game, so that troubles and frauds that occur during the game are advanced. I have confirmed. The counting device 111 transmits an error signal to the main control device 110 when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the number of circulating spheres. Further, the counting device 111 transmits an error cancellation signal to the main control device 110 when it is determined that the number of circulating spheres or more has been eliminated.

  When main controller 110 receives an error signal from counting device 111, it sets error flag 203c to on, and when it receives an error release signal from counting device 111, it sets error flag 203c to off. When the main controller 110 detects that the all-sleep button 301 has been operated, only when the error flag 203c is on, the main controller 110 enables the operation of the all-sleep button 301 and stops the progress of the game.

  Accordingly, the player temporarily stops the progress of the game by operating the all sleep button 301 only in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game. Therefore, when a game is played without any problem, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player accidentally operates the all sleep button 301 and the progress of the game is temporarily stopped. In addition, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game temporarily while the game can be performed by the fraudster and to prevent any fraudulent activity from being performed while the game is stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. Similar to the first embodiment, this main process executes the main process of the game, and is executed after the start-up process (FIG. 19) described above in the first embodiment.

  In the main process in the second embodiment, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds as in the first embodiment, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time. Also, in the processing of S1706, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the processing at the time of power interruption is performed. Execute (S1710 to S1713) and continue the infinite loop. Since the processes in S1701 to S1713 are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the main process in the second embodiment, in the remaining time after the periodic process of a 4 msec cycle, following the counter update process of S1708 and S1709, a process when an error signal or an error release signal is received from the counting device 111, all Processing when the sleep button 301 is operated is executed.

  Specifically, after the processing of S1709, it is determined whether or not an error signal has been received from the counting device 111 (S1721). If an error signal has been received (S1721: Yes), the error flag 203c is turned on. After setting (S1722), the process proceeds to S1723. If no error signal has been received (S1721: No), the process of S1722 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1723.

  In the processing of S1723, it is determined whether or not an error cancellation signal has been received from the counting device 111 (S1723). If the error cancellation signal has been received (S1723: Yes), the error flag 203c is set to OFF ( The process proceeds to S1724) and S1725. If an error release signal has not been received (S1723: No), the process of S1724 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1725.

  As described above, the counting device 111 transmits an error signal to the main control device 110 when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the number of circulating spheres. Further, the counting device 111 transmits an error cancellation signal to the main control device 110 when it is determined that the number of circulating spheres or more has been eliminated. Therefore, by executing the processing of S1721 to S1724, it can be indicated by the error flag 203c that there is a situation in which it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball.

  In the process of S1725, it is determined whether or not the all sleep button 301 has been operated (S1725). If the all sleep button 301 has not been operated (S1725: No), the process directly returns to the process of S1706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the all-sleep button 301 has been operated (S1725: No), it is then determined whether or not the error flag 203c is on (S1726).

  If the error flag 203c is on (S1826: Yes), it is a case where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball, so an all sleep command is set first. (S1727). The all sleep command set here is transmitted to the counting device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the all-sleep command, the counting device 111 stops the launch of the sphere and executes a loop process.

  In addition, when the audio lamp device 113 receives the all-sleep command, the audio output device 226 outputs an audio message indicating that the game has been temporarily stopped by the player, or the lamp display device 227 (lighting units 32 to 36). ) Is lit or blinked, or the display control device 114 is controlled to display on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, the hall clerk can be notified that the player has operated the all-sleep command to temporarily stop the game in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the store clerk can confirm why the game has been stopped by the player who has temporarily stopped the game, and can solve the problem (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 in some cases. Further, by notifying that the game has been temporarily stopped, it is possible to reduce the feeling that the player intends to operate the all-sleep button 301 in order to perform mischief or some illegal act.

  After the processing of S1727, it is determined again whether or not the all sleep button 301 has been operated (S1728). Then, while the all sleep button 301 is not operated (S1728; No), the process of S1728 continues to loop. This stops the game control. Therefore, the game control is temporarily stopped in the main control device 110, and the launch of the ball is stopped in the counting device 111 by the all-sleep command transmitted by the processing of S1727, so that the progress of the game itself is temporarily stopped. Will be stopped.

  As described above, when the processing of S1725 to S1728 is executed, the player in the pachinko machine 10 is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. When the sleep button 301 is operated, the progress of the game can be temporarily stopped.

  Here, as described above, in a general pachinko machine in which a player launches a ball to the game board while loading the ball, even if the ball is clogged, unless the ball clogging is a part related to the ball launch, As long as the ball is loaded, the ball can be continuously fired to the game board and the game can be continued. However, in the in-flight circulation type gaming machine as in this embodiment, since the player cannot freely load the balls, when a ball clogging occurs, the regular number of balls no longer circulate, and the ball launch itself May not be as intended by the player. If this happens, for example, when the player is in an advantageous state such as a jackpot, the advantageous state (bonus) will end with the passage of time unless the progress of the game stops. The player will be penalized. In addition, there is a fear that such a disadvantage will occur, and there is a risk that the player will not be able to play the game with the in-flight circulation type gaming machine with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player operates the all sleep button 301 when there is a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. Since the progress of the game can be temporarily stopped in accordance with the player's intention, the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage. In addition, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the operation of the all sleep button 301 is effective only when the error flag 203c is on, that is, when it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until the game does not need to be temporarily stopped by operating the Aus sleep button 301. Therefore, when a game is played without any problem, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player accidentally operates the all sleep button 301 and the progress of the game is temporarily stopped. In addition, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game temporarily while the game can be performed by the fraudster and to prevent any fraudulent activity from being performed while the game is stopped.

  In addition, while the main control device 110 temporarily stops controlling the game, the main control device 110 receives commands related to the progress of the game (variation pattern command, stop type command, fanfare command, round number command, ending command). Etc.) is not transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, while the main control device 110 temporarily stops the control of the game, the effects related to the game including the variation effect and the jackpot effect are the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227 (lighting units 32-36). This is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 are stopped, so that not only the above-mentioned notification but also the stop of the execution of the effects indicates that the game has been temporarily stopped. A store clerk can be easily recognized.

  If it is detected as a result of the processing of S1728 that the all-sleep button 301 has been operated (S1728: Yes), an all-sleep cancel command is set (S1729), the process returns to the processing of S1706, and the game control is resumed. To do.

  The all sleep cancel command set in the process of S1729 is transmitted to the counting device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113. When the counting device 111 receives the all-sleep cancel command, the counting device 111 resumes the launch of the sphere. Therefore, the game proceeds again with the resumption of the game control of the main controller 110. In addition, when receiving the all-sleep cancel command, the sound lamp control device 113 ends the notification that the game has been temporarily stopped by the player.

  In this way, the progress of the temporarily stopped game can be resumed by the player's intention by operating the all sleep button 301 again by the player.

  Even if it is determined by the processing of S1725 that the all-sleep button 301 is operated (S1725: Yes), if the error flag 203c is off (S1726: No), the processing returns to S1706 as it is. In other words, even if the player operates the all-sleep button 301 when it seems that it is not possible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball, the progress of the game is continued. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game. Therefore, when a game is played without any problem, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player accidentally operates the all sleep button 301 and the progress of the game is temporarily stopped. In addition, it is possible to suppress any fraudulent act by the fraudulent person or unfairly advantageous state for the player while the progress of the game is stopped.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on, as in the first embodiment.

  The difference from the start-up process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment is that after it is determined that the door frame 14 is not in the open state (S1760: No), the first ball number determination process (S1762; see FIG. 23). ) Is executed before the ball collection process (S3000) is executed. Through this ball collection process (S3000), the balls stopped on the winning ball side stopping device 310 and the out ball side stopping device 311 are discharged from the devices 310 and 311 and the discharged balls are discharged to the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out. The number of detected balls detected by the ball detection switch 48 is added to the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 231c.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal (S1756: Yes), before the initial setting (S1759) of the peripheral device of the MPU 221 is performed, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared. However, in the second embodiment, after the ball collection process (S3000), before the first ball number determination process (S1762), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared (S3100). As a result, in the ball collection process (S3000), information on occurrence of power interruption can be used.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the ball collection process (S3000) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the ball collection process (S3000). This ball collection process (S3000) is one process of the start-up process executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 as described above.

  In the ball collection process (S3000), first, the launch control device 112 is instructed to launch one ball (S3001). Upon receiving a ball launch instruction for one ball, the launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 only once without supplying the ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (ball feed). That is, the ball launch unit 66 is driven unconditionally (regardless of whether or not a ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66). At this time, if the ball supplied to the ball launching unit 66 at the time of power interruption remains without being launched, the ball is actually launched. Also, if no ball remains in the ball launch unit 66 at the time of power interruption, the ball is shot empty.

  Next, the process waits for 30 seconds (S3002). As a result, if the ball has been fired by the processing of S3001, the ball flows down the game board 13 and enters the winning ports 3, 4, 5a or the out port 6. Here, the ball that has entered the ball is stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320.

  Next, the ball stopping plate 312 of the winning ball side stopping device 310 is moved (opened) to a position where the ball flows down (S3003), and the balls stopped by the winning ball side stopping device 310 are discharged from the winning ball side stopping device 310. . The ball discharged here is a ball that has been flowing down the game board 30 or a ball that has been launched toward the game board 30 when the occurrence of a power interruption before the power is turned on is detected. Thereafter, the balls that entered the various winning openings 3, 4, and 5a and the balls that were fired by the processing of S3001 (that is, the balls that were supplied to the ball launching unit 66 at the time of the power interruption remained without being fired). ) And balls that have entered the various winning openings 3, 4, and 5a.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S3004). If the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S3004: Yes), the value of the possessed ball counter 213a before the power interruption and the value of the circulating ball number memory 213c are held, so that the winning ball In order to reflect the number of balls stopped at the side stopping device 310 in the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c, it is determined whether or not the winning ball detection switch 47 is turned on (S3005).

  If the winning ball detection switch 47 is turned on (S3005: Yes), 1 is added to the possessed ball counter 213a and 1 is added to the circulating ball number memory 213c (S3006), and the process proceeds to S3007. As a result of the process of S3005, if the winning ball detection switch 47 is not turned on (S3005: No), the process of S3006 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3007.

  As a result of the processing of S3004, if the information on the occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the RAM 213 (S3004: No), the value of the possessed ball counter 213a and the value of the circulating ball number memory 213c are already initialized. Means that. Therefore, in this case, the processes of S3005 and S3006 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3007. That is, in this case, only the process of discharging the balls stopped by the winning ball side stopping device 310 from the winning ball side stopping device 310 is executed.

  In the process of S3007, it is determined whether 5 seconds have elapsed after the ball stop plate 312 of the winning ball side stop device 310 is opened (S3007). If 5 seconds have not elapsed since the ball stop plate 312 of the winning ball side stop device 310 was opened (S3007: No), the process returns to S3004. On the other hand, when 5 seconds have passed since the ball stop plate 312 of the winning ball side stopping device 310 is opened (S3007; Yes), it is determined that all the balls stopped in the winning ball side stopping device 310 are discharged, The process proceeds to S3008.

  Note that the time used for the determination in S3007 (the time after the ball stop plate 312 of the winning ball side stopping device 310 is opened) is a time during which all the balls stopped on the winning ball side stopping device 310 can be discharged. For example, an arbitrary time may be set.

  In the process of S3007, instead of the above process, the winning ball detection switch 47 determines whether or not a time during which no ball is detected continues for a predetermined time, and the winning ball detection switch 47 does not detect a ball. May be determined that all the balls that have been stopped in the winning ball side stopping device 310 have been discharged, and the process may proceed to S3008. Further, a sensor for detecting the presence of a ball is provided in the winning ball side stopping device 310, and when it is determined by the sensor that no ball exists in the winning ball side stopping device 310, the winning ball side stopping device 310 is stopped. It may be determined that all the balls that have been discharged have been discharged, and the process may proceed to S3008.

  In the processing of S3008, the ball stop plate 312 of the winning ball side stopping device 310 is moved (closed) to the position where the ball stops, and the ball distribution plate 311 of the winning ball side stopping device 310 is moved without stopping the ball. It moves to the position (non-stationary side) distributed to the flow path to flow down (S3008). As a result, the winning ball side stopping device 310 is in the state shown in FIG.

  Next, the ball stopping plate 322 of the out ball side stopping device 320 is moved (opened) to a position where the ball flows down (S3009), and the ball stopped by the out ball side stopping device 320 is discharged from the out ball side stopping device 320. To do. The ball discharged here is a ball that has been flowing down the game board 30 or a ball that has been launched toward the game board 30 when the occurrence of a power interruption before the power is turned on is detected. Then, the ball that entered the out port 6 and the ball that was launched by the processing of S3001 (that is, the ball that was supplied to the ball launching unit 66 at the time of power interruption remained without being fired), It is the ball that entered the out port 6.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S3010). If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S3010: Yes), the value of the possessed ball counter 213a before the power failure and the value of the circulating ball number memory 213c are held. In order to reflect the number of balls stopped at the side stopping device 320 in the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c, it is determined whether or not the out ball detection switch 48 is turned on (S3011).

  If the out ball detection switch 48 is on (S3011: Yes), 1 is added to the possessed ball counter 213a and 1 is added to the circulating ball number memory 213c (S3012), and the process proceeds to S3013. If the out-sphere detection switch 48 is not turned on as a result of the process of S3011, the process of S3012 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3013.

  As a result of the processing of S3010, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the RAM 213 (S3010: No), the value of the possessed ball counter 213a and the value of the circulating ball number memory 213c are already initialized. Means that. Therefore, in this case, the processes of S3011 and S3012 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3013. In other words, in this case, only the process of discharging the ball stopped at the out-ball side stopping device 320 from the out-ball side stopping device 320 is executed.

  In the process of S3013, it is determined whether 5 seconds have elapsed after the ball stop plate 322 of the out ball side stop device 320 is opened (S3013). If 5 seconds have not elapsed since the ball stopping plate 322 of the out ball side stopping device 320 was opened (S3013: No), the process returns to S3010. On the other hand, when 5 seconds have passed since the ball stopping plate 322 of the out ball side stopping device 320 is opened (S3013; Yes), it is determined that all the balls stopped in the out ball side stopping device 320 are discharged, The process proceeds to S3014.

  It should be noted that the time used for the determination in S3013 (the time after opening the ball stop plate 322 of the out ball side stopping device 320) is a time during which all the balls stopped in the out ball side stopping device 320 can be discharged. For example, an arbitrary time may be set.

  Also, in the processing of S3013, instead of the above processing, it is determined whether or not the time during which the sphere is not detected is continued for a predetermined time in the out sphere detection switch 48, and the time during which the sphere is not detected in the out sphere detection switch 48 May be determined that all the balls that have been stopped in the out-ball-side stopping device 320 have been discharged, and the process may proceed to S3014. Further, a sensor for detecting the presence of a sphere is provided in the out sphere side stopping device 320, and when it is determined by the sensor that no sphere exists in the out sphere side stopping device 320, the out sphere side stopping device 320 is stopped. It may be determined that all the balls that have been discharged have been discharged, and the process may proceed to S3014.

  In the process of S3014, the ball stopping plate 322 of the out ball side stopping device 320 is moved (closed) to the position where the ball stops, and the ball sorting plate 321 of the out ball side stopping device 320 is moved without stopping the ball. It moves to the position (non-stationary side) distributed to the flow path to flow down (S3014). Thereby, the out ball side stopping device 320 is in the state shown in FIG.

  Here, if a ball flowing down the game board 30 or a ball fired on the game board 30 exists when the power interruption occurs, the ball enters the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a. At this stage, a general winning switch 44 for detecting a ball won in the general winning opening 3, a start winning switch 45 for detecting a ball winning in the starting winning opening 4, and a specific winning switch for detecting a ball won in the specific winning opening 5a. 46 may be in a state where it cannot operate normally. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, after detecting the occurrence of power interruption, the detection of the balls in the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, and the specific winning switch 46 is not confirmed, and no winning ball associated with winning is performed. I am doing so. That is, a ball that is flowing down the game board 30 or a ball that is launched to the game board 30 that is present when a power interruption occurs can be regarded as a ball that has not been used in the game.

  In addition, the occurrence of power interruption may be detected at the stage where the sphere is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the sphere launching unit 66 in order to launch the sphere (the stage where the sphere is fed). At this time, even if the supplied ball is fired by driving the ball launching unit 66 as it is, the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, and thereafter, the ball of the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, and the specific winning switch 46 are changed. Since the detection is not confirmed and no prize ball for winning a prize is given, the fired ball can be regarded as a ball that has not been used in the game.

  On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the winning ball detection switch 47 that detects the balls that have won the various winning holes 3, 4, and 5a and the out ball detection switch 48 that detects the balls that have entered the out port 6 are also normal. It may be in a state where it cannot operate normally. Therefore, even if a ball enters the various winning holes 3, 4, 5a and the out port 6 after the power is cut off, if the ball that has entered the ball is discharged to the discharge passage 42 as it is, the ball may not be detected. It was. Therefore, after the power is cut off, there is a possibility that the number of balls not used in the game cannot be recognized correctly.

  Further, the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game is determined by the counting device 111 using the possessed ball counter 213a when the ball is launched into the game area (in this embodiment, the ball is sent to the launch unit 66). 1 is subtracted at the stage of supplying. As described above, the number of balls that are flowing down the game board 30 when the power is cut off, or balls that are fired on the game board 30, that is, the number of balls that are not used in the game, are correctly recognized after the power is turned off. Can not. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 as in the first embodiment, when a ball is launched into the game area, the number of balls that are not used in the game even if the ball is not used in the game due to power interruption. Can not be added to the possessed ball counter 213a, and there is a possibility that the balls that have not been used in the game may be decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a, causing a disadvantage to the player.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 10 circulates balls in the pachinko machine 10 and uses them for games, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the supply passage 65 in order to monitor the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10. The number of spheres is counted as a circulation sphere number using the circulation sphere number memory 213c. The circulating ball number memory 213c is incremented by 1 as a ball returned to the supply passage 65 when a ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48. However, as described above, when a power interruption occurs, a winning ball detection switch 47 that detects a ball that has won a prize in each of the winning holes 3, 4, and 5a, or an out ball detection switch 48 that detects a ball that has entered a ball in the out hole 6. However, there is a risk that it may not operate normally. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 as in the first embodiment, when the power is cut off, the ball flowing down the game board 30 or the ball launched to the game board 30 is the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball. There was a possibility that the number of circulating spheres could not be correctly counted by the circulating sphere number memory 213c without being detected by the detection switch 48. Therefore, although the predetermined number of balls are stored in the supply passage 65, the circulating ball number memory 213c cannot correctly count the circulating ball number, and thus there is a possibility that an error is notified.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, the balls that have subsequently entered the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a are stopped at the winning ball side stopping device 310, and the out The ball that has entered the mouth 6 is stopped at the out-ball-side stopping device 320. As a result, a ball that is flowing down the game board 30 when a power interruption occurs, or a ball that has been fired on the game board 30, that is, a ball that has not been used in the game, It is stopped at either one of the stop devices 320.

  Then, the counting device 111 performs the ball collection processing shown in FIG. 43 in the start-up processing executed when the power is turned on again, thereby performing the winning ball side stopping device by the processing of S3003 to S3007. The ball stopped at 310 is caused to flow down, and the winning ball detection switch 47 detects the ball that has flowed down. In addition, by the processing of S3009 to S3013, the sphere stopped by the out sphere side stopping device 320 is caused to flow down, and the sphere that has been caused to flow down is detected by the out sphere detection switch 48.

  The winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 can normally detect the ball when the power is turned on again. Accordingly, it is possible to correctly recognize the number of balls flowing down the game board 30 when the power is cut off or balls launched to the game board 30, that is, balls not used in the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when a power interruption is detected after supplying a ball to the ball launch unit 66 and before launching the ball, the ball is not fired and supplied. The ball is retained in the ball launch unit 66. Since this is a state where the power is cut off, a sufficient driving voltage is not supplied to the ball launching unit 66, and even if the ball is launched, the firing strength is weak, and the ball is not guided to the game area and the foul ball This is because the ball may remain in the ball launch unit 66.

  Then, the counting means unconditionally (by the ball launch unit 66) by executing the ball collection process shown in FIG. 43 in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on again. The ball launching unit 66 is driven (whether or not the ball is held in place). Thus, if the ball supplied to the ball launch unit 66 at the time of power interruption remains without being fired (if the ball is retained in the launch unit 66), the ball is launched and flows down the game board 13 Then, the player enters the winning opening 3, 4, 5a or the out opening 6.

  Here, the ball that has entered the ball is stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320. The ball stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320 here is the game board 30 when the power is cut off by the processing of S3003 to S3007 and the processing of S3009 to S3013. The winning ball detection switch is combined with a ball that is flowing down the game board 30 or a ball that has already been stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320. 47 or the out sphere detection switch 48.

  As described above, the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 can normally detect a ball when the power is turned on again. Therefore, after the supply of the ball to the ball launching unit 66 and before the launch of the ball, it is detected that the power has been cut off. Can be recognized.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, after the power is cut off, the game board 30 flows down, is fired to the game board 30, and after the ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66. By detecting a power loss before launching the ball, the number of balls not used in the game can be correctly recognized. Therefore, by adding the number of balls to the possessed ball counter 213a, it is possible to prevent the balls that have not been used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a. Therefore, the player's profit can be protected.

  Further, by this method, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 (by adding the number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 to the circulation ball number memory 213c ( The number of circulating spheres) can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error from being notified even though a predetermined number of balls are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process.

  As in the first embodiment, the main process includes a process of counting the number of balls that are circulated in the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the supply passage 65 for use in the game as the number of circulating balls, and a pachinko machine. The process of checking whether there is any change in the number of circulating balls circulating in 10 and the number of possessed balls that are the number of balls that the player can use for the game are counted, and the number of possessed balls is displayed on the data display 24. A process of displaying and a process of permitting or stopping the launch of the sphere to the launch control device 112 are executed. Further, when the occurrence of power interruption is detected, processing at the time of power interruption is executed.

  The main processing of the counting device 111 according to the second embodiment is different from the main processing (see FIG. 24) of the counting device 111 according to the first embodiment in that the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 by the processing of S1907. When it is determined that there is a power interruption (S1907: Yes), after prohibiting the generation of each interrupt processing (S1911), the ball distribution plate of the winning ball side stopping device 310 311 and the ball sorting plate 321 of the out-ball-side stopping device 320 are moved to the positions (stopping side) where the balls are distributed to the flow path where the balls are stopped (S1920), and the process proceeds to S1912.

  The ball stop plate 312 of the winning ball side stop device 310 and the ball stop plate 322 of the out ball side stop device 320 are moved to the position where the ball stops by the processing of S3008 and S3014 of the ball collection processing (FIG. 41) ( Closed). When the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, the process of S1920 is executed, so that the winning ball side stopping device 310 and the out ball side stopping device 320 are in the state shown in FIG. As a result, after the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, the balls that have entered the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a are stopped at the winning ball side stopping device 310, and the balls that have entered the out opening 6 are It can be stopped at the side stopping device 320. Therefore, a ball that is flowing down the game board 30 when a power interruption occurs, or a ball that has been fired on the game board 30, that is, a ball that has not been used in the game, It can be stopped at either one of the devices 320.

  As described above, the balls collected in the winning side stop device 310 and the out side stop device 320 are subjected to the ball collection process shown in FIG. 41 in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on again. As a result, it is discharged from the winning side stop device 310 and the out side stopping device 320 and detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48. The winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 can normally detect the ball when the power is turned on again, so that the ball or the game board 30 flowing down the game board 30 when the power is cut off. It is possible to correctly recognize the number of balls that have been fired, that is, balls that have not been used in the game.

  Next, the first ball number determination process (S1712) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the first ball number determination process (S1712).

  This first ball number determination process is a process executed in the start-up process executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 as in the first embodiment, and the door frame 14 is closed after the power is turned on. Then, when the game can be started (a ball can be launched), the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is a predetermined number (50 balls in the present embodiment). This is a process for confirming whether or not there is.

  The first ball number determination process in the second embodiment is different from the first ball number determination process in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, in the process of S1810, the cylinder lock 21a rotates clockwise in front view. When it is determined that the rotation operation is not performed (S1810: No), or when it is determined that the door frame 14 is closed in the process of S1812 (S1812: Yes), the process returns to the process of S1810. In the second embodiment, in such a case, the processing of S3051 and S3052 is executed.

  In the process of S3051, it is determined whether or not the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S3051). While it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has not been operated (S3051: No), the process returns to S1810, and S1810. ˜S1812, S3051 are repeatedly executed. If it is determined that the error release button 120 has been operated (S3051: Yes), the process exits the loop process of S1810 to S1812, and S3051, and proceeds to the process of S3052.

  After various errors are notified by the loop processing in S1810 to S1812, and S3051, the door frame 14 can be opened by executing control for driving the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99. Thereby, the hall personnel can open the door frame 14 after being notified of various errors, and can confirm whether or not a ball is clogged and remains in the game area or the like. Further, while the loop processing in S1810 to S1812, and S3051 is being performed, with the inner frame 12 opened, the lever 67c is pulled to extract the sphere stored in the supply passage 65 from the sphere extraction passage 67. It is possible to check whether or not there is any problem in the hand, or to replace another sphere with the supply passage 65. In this way, after the hall personnel take action to eliminate the error state, the hall personnel operates the error release button 120, and the process proceeds to S3052.

  In the process of S3052, the error notification is canceled (S3052), and the process returns to the process of S1801. From the detection results of the 51 ball detection switch 91 and the 50 ball detection switch 92, all the balls stored in the supply passage 65 are stored. It is determined whether the number of is 50 balls. Then, unless it is determined that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is 50, any one of the under error notification, the over error notification, and the switch error notification is notified again, and the process proceeds to S1810 again. To do.

  On the other hand, returning from the process of S3052 to the process of S1801, it is determined from the detection results of the 51-ball detection switch 91 and the 50-ball detection switch 92 that the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 is 50. If so, the process proceeds to S1803.

  As described above, in the first ball number determination process in the second embodiment, even if various errors are notified, the loop state (see the processes in S1810 to S1812 in FIG. 23) does not occur as in the first embodiment. When the error state is resolved, the process proceeds to S1803 to initialize the various memories 213c and 213d and the various counters 213f and 213g, and then returns to the start-up process. Thus, as in the first embodiment, the main process is started by the counting device 111 and the normal processing is performed without re-powering on the power source, so that the counting device 111 can lend a ball without trouble. It becomes possible to play a game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a command determination process (S1901) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1901). As in the first embodiment, the command determination process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111. The command received from the main controller 110 is determined and Processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The command determination process in the second embodiment is different from the command determination process in the first embodiment when it is determined that the ball determination command is not received in the process of S2010 (S2010: No), and then The process of determining whether or not the all sleep command is received (S3021) is executed.

  As a result of the process of S3021, when it is determined that the all sleep command has not been received (S3021: No), the process proceeds to S2012. On the other hand, if it is determined that the all-sleep command has been received as a result of the processing in S3021 (S3021: Yes), the firing control device 112 is instructed to stop firing (S3022), and then the all-sleep cancel command has been received. Is discriminated (S3023). Then, while the all sleep cancel command is not received (S3023: No), the process of S3023 is repeatedly executed. That is, the loop processing is entered. Thereby, the state where the launch of the sphere is stopped is maintained.

  As described above, the all-sleep command indicates that the main controller 110 has operated the all-sleep button 301 in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. This command is transmitted by the main controller 110 when detected. In the main control device 110, after transmitting this all-sleep command, the loop processing is started and the control of the game is stopped.

  That is, when the all-sleep button 301 is operated in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging, the main controller 110 temporarily controls the game. In the counting device 111, since the ball is stopped, the progress of the game itself can be temporarily stopped.

  Here, as described above, in the in-flight circulation type gaming machine as in the present embodiment, since the player cannot freely load the balls, when a ball clogging occurs, the regular number of balls no longer circulate. The ball may not be fired as intended by the player. If this happens, for example, when the player is in an advantageous state such as a jackpot, the advantageous state (bonus) will end with the passage of time unless the progress of the game stops. The player will be penalized. In addition, there is a fear that such a disadvantage will occur, and there is a risk that the player will not be able to play the game with the in-flight circulation type gaming machine with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player operates the all sleep button 301 when there is a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. Since the progress of the game can be temporarily stopped in accordance with the player's intention, the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage. In addition, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  If it is determined that the all-sleep cancel command has been received as a result of the processing in S3023 (S3023: Yes), the loop processing is exited, and the launch control device 112 is instructed to permit launch (S3024), and the ball is launched. Resume and end the command determination process.

  As described above, the all sleep cancel command is used when the main control device 110 detects that the all sleep button 301 is operated in a situation where the game control is temporarily stopped in the main control device 110. , A command transmitted by the main controller 110. The main control device 110 resumes the game control after transmitting this all-sleep cancel command.

  When the counting device 111 receives the all-sleep cancel command, the counting device 111 resumes the ball firing as described above, so that the game can be advanced again in conjunction with the resumption of the game control of the main control device 110. That is, the progress of the temporarily stopped game can be resumed by the player's intention by operating the all sleep button 301 again by the player.

  Next, the second ball number determination process (S2016) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the process in FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second ball number determination process (S2016). This second ball number determination process is a process executed in the circulating ball number counting process, which is one process of the main process, as in the first embodiment.

  The second ball number determination process in the second embodiment is different from the second ball number determination process in the first embodiment as follows. That is, when various errors are notified by the processing of S2215, S2217, S2220, S2222, and S2224, after setting interrupt prohibition (S2225), processing for transmitting an error signal to the main controller 110 (S3201) is executed. Thus, the process proceeds to S2226. Also, in the processing of S2231, when it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S2231: Yes), the error notification is canceled (S2232), and then an error cancel signal is transmitted to the main controller 110 (S3202). ) Is executed, and the process proceeds to S2233.

  By transmitting these error signal and error release signal to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 turns on / off the error flag 203c based on the reception of the error signal and the error release signal, and the The main controller 110 can determine whether or not it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a ball that is circulating due to an abnormality. The operation of the all sleep button 301 is made effective only when the circulating ball cannot be fired due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game. Therefore, when a game is played without any problem, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player accidentally operates the all sleep button 301 and the progress of the game is temporarily stopped. In addition, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game temporarily while the game can be performed by the fraudster and to prevent any fraudulent activity from being performed while the game is stopped.

  Next, the possessed ball counting process (S1903) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the process in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the possessed ball counting process (S1903). This possessed ball counting process is a process executed in the main process, as in the first embodiment.

  The possessed ball counting process in the second embodiment is different from the possessed ball counting process in the first embodiment as follows. That is, in the possessed ball counting process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball detection switch 68a is turned on (S2310), and when the game ball detection switch 68a is turned on (S2310: Yes), that is, when the gaming ball detection switch 68a detects that the ball has been guided to the upper part of the gaming board 13 through the ball guide passage 60, the possessed ball counter 203a is decremented by one. A process (S2311) and a process of turning on the possessed ball change flag (S2312) were executed.

  In contrast, in the second embodiment, the process of S3211 is executed instead of the process of S2310. In the process of S3211, the ball feed detection switch 94 detects whether or not the ball feed detection switch 94 is turned on, that is, whether or not a ball has been supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (ball feed has been performed). It is determined whether or not it has been done (S3211). When the ball feed detection switch 94 is turned on (S3211: Yes), that is, the ball feed detection switch 94 indicates that the ball has been supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (ball feed has been performed). If it is detected, a process of decrementing the possessed ball counter 203a by 1 (S2311) and a process of turning on the possessed ball change flag (S2312) are executed. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3211, when the ball feed detection switch 94 is not on but off (S3211: No), the processing of S2311 and S2312 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S2313.

  Unless there is a special circumstance that the power is cut off, if the ball is fed, the ball that is sent is always fired and used for games. Therefore, by updating the possessed sphere when the ball feed is detected, the consumed sphere can be reflected in the possessed sphere counter 203a without delay. Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the ball launching unit 66 always launches a ball with an intensity that is guided to the game area. That is, in a normal game, the ball launch unit 66 is driven with such a strength that the ball launched by the ball launch unit 66 does not become a foul ball.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball launch unit 66 is provided below the game board 13 below the pachinko machine 10, and the launched ball is guided to the game area through the ball guide passage 66 formed by the rails 61 and 62. As described above, the ball launch unit 66 may be provided on the upper left side of the game board 13 and the ball may be fired directly toward the play board 13 from the upper left side. As a result, the fired ball does not become a foul ball and can always be launched into the game area.

  Next, the door frame opening process (S1909) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the door frame opening process (S1909). This door frame opening process is a process executed in the main process, as in the first embodiment.

  The door frame opening process in the second embodiment is different from the door frame opening process in the first embodiment in that it is determined in the process of S2406 that the door frame 14 is closed (S2406: Yes), or the process of S2413. When it is determined that the error cancel button 120 has been operated (S2413: Yes), the error notification is canceled (S2407), and then a process of transmitting an error cancel signal to the main controller 110 (S3221) is executed. , S2408.

  By transmitting this error cancellation signal to main controller 110, main controller 110 turns on / off error flag 203c based on the reception of this error cancellation signal and an error signal transmitted in another process, and The main controller 110 can determine whether or not it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as clogging. The operation of the all sleep button 301 is made effective only when the circulating ball cannot be fired due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the third ball number determination process (S2404, S2704, S2804) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the third ball number determination process (S2404, S2704, S2804). This third ball number determination process is a process executed in the door frame opening process, the payment process, and the jackpot end ball determination process, as in the first embodiment.

  The third ball number determination process in the second embodiment is different from the third ball number determination process in the first embodiment in that various errors are notified by the processes of S2503, S2504, S2506, S2508, S2510, and S2512. In this case, a process of transmitting an error signal to the main controller 110 (S3231) is executed, and this process is terminated.

  By transmitting this error signal to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 turns on / off the error flag 203c based on the reception of this error signal and an error cancellation signal transmitted in another process, and the ball is jammed. The main control device 110 can determine whether or not it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as the above. The operation of the all sleep button 301 is made effective only when the circulating ball cannot be fired due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the fourth ball number determination process (S2408, S2714, S2814) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the fourth ball number determination process (S2408, S2714, S2814). This fourth ball number determination process is a process executed in the door frame opening process, the payment process, and the jackpot end ball determination process, as in the first embodiment.

  The fourth ball number determination process in the second embodiment is different from the fourth ball number determination process in the first embodiment in that an error signal is generated when various errors are notified by the processes of S2603, S2604, and S2606. The process (S3241) to be transmitted to the main controller 110 is executed, and this process is terminated.

  By transmitting this error signal to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 turns on / off the error flag 203c based on the reception of this error signal and an error cancellation signal transmitted in another process, and the ball is jammed. The main control device 110 can determine whether or not it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as the above. The operation of the all sleep button 301 is made effective only when the circulating ball cannot be fired due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the adjustment process (S1904) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the settlement process (S1904). This settlement process is a process executed in the main process, as in the first embodiment.

  The adjustment process in the second embodiment is different from the adjustment process in the first embodiment. After the error notification is canceled by the process of S2713, an error release signal is transmitted to the main controller 110 (S3251), and S2714. It is a point which transfers to the process of.

  By transmitting this error cancellation signal to main controller 110, main controller 110 turns on / off error flag 203c based on the reception of this error cancellation signal and an error signal transmitted in another process, and The main controller 110 can determine whether or not it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as clogging. The operation of the all sleep button 301 is made effective only when the circulating ball cannot be fired due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the jackpot end ball determination process (S1905) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the settlement process (S1905). This jackpot end ball determination process is a process executed in the main process, as in the first embodiment.

  The big hit end sphere determination process in the second embodiment is different from the big hit end sphere determination process in the first embodiment in that after the error notification is released by the process of S2813, an error release signal is transmitted to the main controller 110. (S3261), and the process proceeds to S2814.

  By transmitting this error cancellation signal to main controller 110, main controller 110 turns on / off error flag 203c based on the reception of this error cancellation signal and an error signal transmitted in another process, and The main controller 110 can determine whether or not it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as clogging. The operation of the all sleep button 301 is made effective only when the circulating ball cannot be fired due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the normal time ball determination process (S1906) executed by the MPU 211 in the counting device 111 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the normal time ball determination processing (S1906). This normal time ball determination process is a process executed in the main process, as in the first embodiment.

  The normal time ball determination process in the second embodiment differs from the normal time ball determination process in the first embodiment in that an error signal is sent to the main controller 110 when various errors are notified by the processes of S2906 and S2911. The process of transmitting to (S3271) is executed, and the normal time ball determination process is terminated.

  By transmitting this error signal to the main control device 110, the main control device 110 turns on / off the error flag 203c based on the reception of this error signal and an error cancellation signal transmitted in another process, and the ball is jammed. The main control device 110 can determine whether or not it is in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as the above. The operation of the all sleep button 301 is made effective only when the circulating ball cannot be fired due to an abnormality such as a ball clogging. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a firing control process executed by the firing control device 112 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this launch control process. In this firing control process, when the ball shooting is permitted from the counting device 111, the touch sensor 39a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 39, and a stop switch for stopping the ball firing. On the condition that 39b is off (not operated), a control is performed to supply (ball feed) a ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66, and the ball launch unit 66 is driven to rotate the operation handle. And control to fire the ball with the launch intensity according to the. Further, when there is an instruction to fire one ball from the counting device 111, the ball launching unit 66 is controlled to be driven without supplying the ball to the ball launching unit 66 from the supply passage 65 (without feeding the ball). Do.

  In this firing control process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction to fire one ball from the counting device 111 (S3501). As a result, if there is a one-ball launch instruction (S3501: Yes), the ball launch unit 66 is driven (S3502), and the process proceeds to S3503. On the other hand, if there is no one-ball launch instruction (S3501: No), the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

  As described above, a single ball launch instruction is transmitted to the launch control device 112 in the ball collection process (FIG. 41), which is one process of the start-up process, when the power is turned on again. Is. Upon receiving a ball launch instruction for one ball, the launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 only once without supplying the ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (ball feed). Become. That is, when the power is turned on again, the ball launch unit 66 is driven unconditionally (regardless of whether or not a ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66). At this time, if the ball is retained in the launch unit 66, the retained ball is fired. On the other hand, if the ball is not held in the firing unit 66, it is idle.

  As will be described later, when the launch control device 112 receives a power-off command from the counting device 111 after firing a ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 and before firing the ball, the launch control device 112 launches the supplied ball. And keep it in the ball launch unit 66.

  This is because when a ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 in order to launch a ball, when the occurrence of a power interruption is detected, the ball launch unit 66 is driven as it is to launch the supplied ball. Even after the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, and the specific winning switch 46 do not detect the ball, and the winning ball associated with the winning is not performed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the winning ball detection switch 47 that detects the balls that have won the various winning holes 3, 4, and 5a, and the out ball detection switch 48 that detects the balls that have entered the out port 6 are also normally used. Even if a ball enters the winning holes 3, 4, 5a and the out port 6 after the power is cut off after the power is cut off, the ball is discharged to the discharge passage 42 as it is. This is because the number of balls that have not been used in the game may not be correctly recognized after the power is cut off.

  On the other hand, when a ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are decremented by one. Therefore, if the number of balls returned to the supply passage 65 without being used in the game cannot be correctly recognized, the values of the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c cannot be updated to the correct values, and thus were not used in the game. Nevertheless, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a decreases, causing a player's disadvantage, or the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 (the number of circulating balls) cannot be counted correctly, so an error is notified. There was a risk of being.

  In this pachinko machine 10, if a power-off command is received from the counting device 111 after a ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 and before the ball is launched, the ball launches without firing the supplied ball. While the ball is held in the unit 66, if the ball is held in the launch unit 66 by unconditionally driving the ball launch unit 66 when the power is turned on again, the held ball is removed. Fire. After that, the launched ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48. Based on the detection, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are incremented by one, It is possible to prevent a ball that has not been used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a to protect the player's profit, or to prevent the error from being notified by correctly counting the number of circulating balls. .

  Next, in S3503, it is determined whether or not there has been an instruction for permission to fire from the counting device 111 (S3503). As a result, when there is no instruction for permission to fire (S3503: No), the process returns to the process of S3501. Thereby, when there is no instruction | indication of permission to launch, the launch of the ball is not performed. Therefore, in this case, even if the player operates the operation handle 39, the ball is not fired.

  On the other hand, if the launch is permitted (S3503: Yes), it is then determined whether the touch sensor 39a of the operation handle 39 is touched (S3504). If the touch sensor 39a is touched (S3504: Yes), it is further determined whether the stop switch 39b of the operation handle 39 is turned off (S3505).

  As a result, when the touch sensor 39a of the operation handle is touched (S3504: Yes) and the stop switch 39b of the operation handle 39 is off (S3505: Yes), the ball launch unit is used to launch the ball. The ball is sent to 66 (S3506).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a power-off command has been received from the counting device 111 (S3507). If no power-off command has been received (S3507: No), the launch strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 39 is determined. Then, the ball launching unit 66 is driven (S3508). Thereby, a ball is launched toward the game area.

  Then, it is determined again whether the power-off command has been received from the counting device 111 (S3509). If the power-off command has not been received (S3509: No), whether or not there is an instruction to stop firing from the counting device 111 It is determined whether or not (S3510). As a result, if there is no instruction to stop the firing (S3510: No), it is determined whether or not 610 milliseconds have passed since the ball was sent to the ball launching unit 66 by the process of S3506 (S3511), and 610 milliseconds passed. If not (S3511: No), the process returns to S3509. If 610 milliseconds have elapsed since the ball was sent to the ball launching unit 66 (S3511: Yes), the process returns to S3504. By the process of S3511, the ball is launched toward the game area after at least 610 milliseconds.

  On the other hand, when the touch sensor 39a of the operation handle 39 is not touched as a result of 3504 (S3504: No), or when the stop switch 39b of the operation handle 39 is turned on as a result of the processing of S3505 (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3509. Thereby, when the touch sensor 39a of the operation handle 39 is not touched or when the stop switch 39b of the operation handle 39 is turned on, the ball is not fired.

  When it is determined that the touch sensor 39a of the operation handle 39 is not touched by the process of S3504 (S3504: No), it is determined that the stop switch 39b of the operation handle 39 is turned on by the process of S3505. In the case (S3505: No), the processing of S3506 is skipped, and the supply of the sphere to the ball launch unit 66 is not performed. By determining that 610 milliseconds have passed since the transmission (S3511: Yes) "and processing, it is possible to suppress an infinite loop in the processing of S3509 to S3511.

  If it is determined in S3507 or S3509 that a power-off command has been received (S3507: No, S3509: No), the process returns to S3501. The power-off command is a command that is transmitted to the launch control device 112 when the counting device 111 detects the occurrence of power-off. When the power is cut off by the processes of S3507 and S3509, the launch of the sphere is stopped, and the loop process of S3501 to S3503 is entered to wait until the power is completely cut off.

  In particular, in the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not a power-off command has been received after the ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66 by the process of S3506 and before the ball is launched by the ball launch unit 66. doing. When the power-off command is received, that is, when the occurrence of power-off is detected (S3507: Yes), the process proceeds to S3501 without firing the ball supplied to the ball launch unit 66. The ball is kept in the ball launching unit 66 and waits until the power is completely cut off.

  The sphere kept here is launched by unconditionally driving the sphere launch unit 66 when the power is turned on again as described above. After that, the launched ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48. Based on the detection, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are incremented by one, It is possible to prevent a ball that has not been used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a to protect the player's profit, or to prevent the error from being notified by correctly counting the number of circulating balls. .

  If it is determined by the process of S3510 that there is an instruction to stop firing (S3510: Yes), the process returns to S3501. Thus, when the counting device 111 gives an instruction to stop firing, the process enters the loop processing of S3501 to S3503. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation handle 39 until the counting device 111 gives an instruction to permit firing. , The ball is not fired.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the ball feed detection switch 94 detects that a ball has been supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (ball sent). If the ball is consumed, the possessed ball counter 213a is decremented by 1. Unless there is a special circumstance that the power is cut off, if the ball is fed, the ball that is sent is always fired and used for games. Therefore, by updating the possessed sphere when the ball feed is detected, the consumed sphere can be reflected in the possessed sphere counter 203a without delay.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when power-off is detected, the balls that have been won in the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a thereafter are upstream of the winning ball detection switch 47. The ball that has entered the out port 6 after the power-off is detected is temporarily stopped on the upstream side of the out ball detection switch 48. Then, in the start-up process executed by the counting device 111 when the power is turned on again, the ball stopped upstream from the winning ball detection switch 47 is caused to flow down, and the winning ball detection switch 47 causes the ball to flow down. Each time is detected, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a is incremented by 1 assuming that the ball has not been used in the game. In addition, in the start-up process, the ball stopped upstream from the out ball detection switch 48 is caused to flow down, and each time the ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 48, the ball is not used in the game. As a result, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a is incremented by one.

  Here, if a ball flowing down the game board 30 or a ball fired on the game board 30 exists when the power interruption occurs, the ball enters the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a. At this stage, a general winning switch 44 for detecting a ball won in the general winning opening 3, a start winning switch 45 for detecting a ball winning in the starting winning opening 4, and a specific winning switch for detecting a ball won in the specific winning opening 5a. 46 may be in a state where it cannot operate normally. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, after detecting the occurrence of power interruption, the detection of the balls in the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, and the specific winning switch 46 is not confirmed, and no winning ball associated with winning is performed. I am doing so. That is, a ball that is flowing down the game board 30 or a ball that is launched to the game board 30 that is present when a power interruption occurs can be regarded as a ball that has not been used in the game.

  On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the winning ball detection switch 47 that detects the balls that have won the various winning holes 3, 4, and 5a and the out ball detection switch 48 that detects the balls that have entered the out port 6 are also normal. It may be in a state where it cannot operate normally. Therefore, even if a ball enters the various winning holes 3, 4, 5a and the out port 6 after the power is cut off, if the ball that has entered the ball is discharged to the discharge passage 42 as it is, the ball may not be detected. It was. Therefore, after the power is cut off, there is a possibility that the number of balls not used in the game cannot be recognized correctly.

  Further, the number of possessed balls that the player can use for the game is determined by the counting device 111 using the possessed ball counter 213a when the ball is launched into the game area (in this embodiment, the ball is sent to the launch unit 66). 1 is subtracted at the stage of supplying. As described above, the number of balls that are flowing down the game board 30 when the power is cut off, or balls that are fired on the game board 30, that is, the number of balls that are not used in the game, are correctly recognized after the power is turned off. Can not. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 as in the first embodiment, when a ball is launched into the game area, the number of balls that are not used in the game even if the ball is not used in the game due to power interruption. Can not be added to the possessed ball counter 213a, and there is a possibility that the balls that have not been used in the game may be decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a, causing a disadvantage to the player.

  Further, since the pachinko machine 10 circulates balls in the pachinko machine 10 and uses them for games, the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the supply passage 65 in order to monitor the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10. The number of spheres is counted as a circulation sphere number using the circulation sphere number memory 213c. The circulating ball number memory 213c is incremented by 1 as a ball returned to the supply passage 65 when a ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48. However, as described above, when a power interruption occurs, a winning ball detection switch 47 that detects a ball that has won a prize in each of the winning holes 3, 4, and 5a, or an out ball detection switch 48 that detects a ball that has entered a ball in the out hole 6. However, there is a risk that it may not operate normally. As a result, in the pachinko machine 10 as in the first embodiment, when the power is cut off, the ball flowing down the game board 30 or the ball launched to the game board 30 is the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball. There was a possibility that the number of circulating spheres could not be correctly counted by the circulating sphere number memory 213c without being detected by the detection switch 48. Therefore, although the predetermined number of balls are stored in the supply passage 65, the circulating ball number memory 213c cannot correctly count the circulating ball number, and thus there is a possibility that an error is notified.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, the balls that have subsequently entered the various winning openings 3, 4, 5a are stopped at the winning ball side stopping device 310, and the out The ball that has entered the mouth 6 is stopped at the out-ball-side stopping device 320. When the power is turned on again, the ball stopped by the winning ball side stopping device 310 is caused to flow down, and the winning ball detection switch 47 is made to detect the flowed down ball. Further, the sphere stopped by the out sphere side stopping device 320 is caused to flow down, and the sphere that has been caused to flow down is detected by the out sphere detection switch 48.

  The winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 can normally detect the ball when the power is turned on again. Accordingly, it is possible to correctly recognize the number of balls flowing down the game board 30 when the power is cut off or balls launched to the game board 30, that is, balls not used in the game. Therefore, by adding the number of balls to the possessed ball counter 213a, it is possible to prevent the balls that have not been used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a. Therefore, the player's profit can be protected. Further, by this method, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 (by adding the number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 to the circulation ball number memory 213c ( The number of circulating spheres) can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error from being notified even though a predetermined number of balls are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, if a power failure is detected after supplying a ball to the ball launch unit 66 and before launching the ball, the ball is not fired and supplied. The resulting ball is retained in the ball launch unit 66. Then, in the start-up process executed by the counting device 111 when the power is turned on again, the ball launching unit 66 is unconditionally (regardless of whether or not the ball is retained in the ball launching unit 66). To drive. After that, when a ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48, the supplied ball is changed to the ball launch unit 66 immediately before the power is turned off. It means that the ball is kept in the firing unit 66 and is not used in the game (the ball has not been consumed), so the value of the possessed ball counter 213a that has been decremented by the supply of the ball is incremented by one.

  When the occurrence of a power interruption is detected at the stage where the sphere is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the sphere launch unit 66 in order to launch the sphere (the stage where the sphere is fed), the sphere supplied by driving the sphere launch unit 66 as it is is supplied. After the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, the detection of the ball in the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, and the specific winning switch 46 is not confirmed, and the winning ball accompanying the winning is not performed. Therefore, the launched ball can be regarded as a ball that has not been used in the game.

  On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the winning ball detection switch 47 that detects the balls that have won the various winning holes 3, 4, and 5a and the out ball detection switch 48 that detects the balls that have entered the out port 6 are also normal. It may be in a state where it cannot operate normally. Therefore, even if a ball enters the various winning holes 3, 4, 5a and the out port 6 after the power is cut off, if the ball that has entered the ball is discharged to the discharge passage 42 as it is, the ball may not be detected. It was. Therefore, after the power is cut off, there is a possibility that the number of balls not used in the game cannot be recognized correctly.

  In addition, even if an attempt is made to drive the ball launch unit 66 while the power is cut off, a sufficient drive voltage is not supplied to the ball launch unit 66, the launch intensity is weak, and the ball is placed in the game area. There was also a risk that a foul ball would be formed without being guided or that the ball would remain in the ball launch unit 66.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when a power interruption is detected after supplying a ball to the ball launch unit 66 and before launching the ball, the ball is not fired and supplied. The resulting ball is retained in the ball launch unit 66. Then, the ball launch unit 66 is driven unconditionally (regardless of whether or not the ball is held in the ball launch unit 66) in the startup process executed when the power is turned on again. . Thus, if the ball supplied to the ball launch unit 66 at the time of power interruption remains without being fired (if the ball is retained in the launch unit 66), the ball is launched and flows down the game board 13 Then, the player enters the winning opening 3, 4, 5a or the out opening 6.

  Here, the ball that has entered the ball is stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320. Then, the ball stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320 is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48. The winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 can normally detect the ball when the power is turned on again. Therefore, after the supply of the ball to the ball launching unit 66 and before the launch of the ball, it is detected that the power has been cut off. Can be recognized. In addition, if the ball launch unit 66 is driven unconditionally (regardless of whether or not the ball is held in the ball launch unit 66) in the startup process executed when the power is turned on again, Since it is good, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a ball is held in the ball launching unit 66, and it is easy to detect a power loss after supplying the ball to the ball launching unit 66 and before firing the ball. As a result, it is possible to correctly recognize a ball that is supplied to the ball launch unit 66 and is not used in the game.

  Therefore, by adding the number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 (the number of balls not used in the game) to the possessed ball counter 213a, the ball not used in the game. Can be prevented from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a. Therefore, the player's profit can be protected. In addition, by this method, the number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 and the out ball detection switch 48 (the number of balls not used in the game) is also added to the circulating ball number memory 213c. The number of spheres stored in the passage 65 (the number of circulating spheres) can be counted correctly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the error from being notified even though a predetermined number of balls are stored in the supply passage 65.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the all-sleep button 301 that can be operated by the player during the game is installed in the pachinko machine 10, and the all-sleep function is in a situation where a serious error such as a ball clogging has occurred. When the button 301 is operated, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped.

  In the in-machine circulation type gaming machine as in the present embodiment, since the player cannot freely load the ball, when the ball clogging occurs, the regular number of balls no longer circulate, and the ball launch itself is the game. May not be performed as intended. If this happens, for example, when the player is in an advantageous state such as a jackpot, the advantageous state (bonus) will end with the passage of time unless the progress of the game stops. The player will be penalized. In addition, there is a fear that such a disadvantage will occur, and there is a risk that the player will not be able to play the game with the in-flight circulation type gaming machine with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player operates the all sleep button 301 when there is a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. The player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage by temporarily stopping the progress of the game in accordance with the player's intention. In addition, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 enables the operation of the all sleep button 301 only when there is a situation in which it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. In other words, the player can operate the all-sleep button 301 to temporarily stop the progress of the game in a situation where it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. Limited to cases. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being temporarily stopped by the player until it is not necessary to temporarily stop the game. Therefore, when a game is played without any problem, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player accidentally operates the all sleep button 301 and the progress of the game is temporarily stopped. In addition, it is possible to suppress the progression of the game temporarily while the game can be performed by the fraudster and to prevent any fraudulent activity from being performed while the game is stopped.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment, there exists the same effect as the effect show | played by the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment by the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated centering on the point which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the ball launch unit 66 is driven unconditionally (regardless of whether or not a ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66). A sphere-only launch was performed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the ball launch unit 66 is driven only when the ball supplied to the ball launch unit 66 is retained, The ball launching unit 66 is fired the ball that is present.

  FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the counting device 111, the firing control device 112, and the card sand device 71 in the third embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, a ball feed signal and a ball launch signal are transmitted from the launch device 112 to the counting device 111. Further, the counting device 111 is provided with a ball feed flag 213k in the RAM 213 as compared with the counting device 111 in the second embodiment.

  The ball feed signal is a signal transmitted to the counting device 111 when the launch control device 112 supplies a ball to the ball launch unit 66 from the supply passage 65 (when the ball is fed). The ball launch signal is a signal transmitted to the counting device 111 when the launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 to launch a ball. The counting device 111 determines whether or not a ball is being sent to the ball launch unit 66 from the ball feed signal and the ball launch signal.

  The ball feed flag 213k is a flag indicating whether or not a ball is being sent to the ball launching unit 66. When the ball feed flag 213k is on, it indicates that the ball is being sent to the ball launching unit 66 and is off. In this case, it is indicated that the ball is not sent to the ball launch unit 66.

  The ball feed flag 213k is determined when the stored contents of the RAM 213 are destroyed when the power is turned on (S1756: No in FIG. 40), or when the RAM erase switch circuit 253 is pressed. As an initial value in the initial setting of the RAM 213 (S1765 in FIG. 40 and S2003 in FIG. 44), which is executed when an initialization command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (in the case of S2001: Yes in FIG. 44). Off is set.

  When the counting device 111 receives the ball feeding signal from the ball launching device 112, it sets the ball feeding flag 213k to indicate that the ball has been sent to the ball launching unit 66. Further, when the counting device 111 receives the ball firing signal from the ball launching device 112, the counting device 111 sets the ball feed flag 213k to off, and the ball sent to the ball launching unit 66 is fired. Indicates that the sphere is not in a sent state (i.e., the sphere launch unit 66 is out of a sphere).

  The ball feed flag 213k is referred to in the ball collection process (see FIG. 56) of the start-up process that is executed when the power is turned on (S3701). Here, the RAM 213 provided with the ball feed flag 213k is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. All data being backed up is backed up. Therefore, in the ball collection process, by determining whether or not the ball feed flag 213k is on, the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 without being fired before the power is turned off. It can be determined whether or not it is retained.

  That is, when a power failure is detected after supplying a ball to the ball launch unit 66 and before launching the ball, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In addition, the supplied ball is kept in the ball launch unit 66 without firing the ball.

  As described in the second embodiment, this is because when the ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 in order to launch the ball, the occurrence of the power interruption is detected as it is. Even when the ball supplied and driven is fired, the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, and thereafter, the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, and the specific winning switch 46 do not detect the ball, and a prize accompanying the winning is obtained. No ball is played, i.e., this launched ball is not used in the game.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the winning ball detection switch 47 that detects the balls that have won the various winning holes 3, 4, and 5a, and the out ball detection switch 48 that detects the balls that have entered the out port 6 are also normally used. Even if a ball enters the winning holes 3, 4, 5a and the out port 6 after the power is cut off after the power is cut off, the ball is discharged to the discharge passage 42 as it is. This is because the number of balls that have not been used in the game may not be correctly recognized after the power is cut off.

  On the other hand, when a ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are decremented by one. Therefore, if the number of balls returned to the supply passage 65 without being used in the game cannot be correctly recognized, the values of the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c cannot be updated to the correct values, and thus were not used in the game. Nevertheless, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a decreases, causing a player's disadvantage, or the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 (the number of circulating balls) cannot be counted correctly, so an error is notified. There was a risk of being.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, when a power-off command is received from the counting device 111 after the ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 and before the ball is launched, the supplied ball is not fired. While the ball launching unit 66 is retained, if the ball is retained in the ball launching unit 66 when the power is turned on again, the ball launching unit 66 is driven to remove the retained ball. Fire.

  Here, when the ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the launch control device 112 transmits a ball feed signal to the counting device 111, so that the ball feed flag 213k is set. Set to on. Then, when the power failure is detected and the supplied ball is held in the ball launch unit 66 without firing the ball, the launch control device 112 does not transmit a ball launch signal to the counting device 111. The power supply is completely turned off while the ball feed flag 213k is on. As described above, since the RAM 213 is backed up, the ball feed flag 213k remains on even while the power is turned off. Therefore, in the ball collection process, if the ball feed flag 213k is on, it means that the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 and is not fired but kept in the ball launch unit 66 before the power is turned off. Judgment can be made.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, in the ball collection process, only when the ball feed flag 213k is on, that is, the ball sent to the ball launch unit 66 before the power is turned off is launched. The ball launching unit 66 is driven to fire the remaining ball to the ball launching unit 66 only when the ball launching unit 66 is retained. Since the ball that has been fired here is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48, based on the detection, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are incremented by 1, thereby playing the game. It is possible to protect the player's profit by preventing the balls not used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a, or to suppress the error notification by correctly counting the number of circulating balls.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the ball is fired only when the ball sent to the ball launching unit 66 at the time of the power cut-off is retained without being fired, so no ball remains. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball launch unit 66 from being driven in vain.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 55, the firing control process executed by the firing control device 112 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this launch control process. This launch control process is similar to the launch control process in the second embodiment (FIG. 53), and touches that the player is touching the operation handle 39 when the counting device 111 is permitted to launch a ball. Control for supplying (ball feeding) a ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66 on condition that the stop switch 39b for detecting the sensor 39a and stopping the ball firing is off (not operated). Then, the ball launching unit 66 is driven, and the ball is fired at the launch intensity corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle. Further, when there is an instruction to fire one ball from the counting device 111, the ball launching unit 66 is controlled to be driven without supplying the ball to the ball launching unit 66 from the supply passage 65 (without feeding the ball). Do.

  The launch control process in the third embodiment is different from the launch control process in the second embodiment in that the sphere is supplied from the supply passage 65 toward the sphere launch unit 66 (the sphere is sent) by the process of S3506. Then, a ball feed signal is transmitted to the counting device 112 (S3551), the process proceeds to S3507, and the ball launch unit 66 is driven by the process of S3508, and the ball sent to the ball launch unit 66 is launched. Then, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the counting device 112 (S3552), and the process proceeds to S3509.

  In this way, the launch control device 112 executes the launch control process, so that when the ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (when the ball is fed), the ball feed signal is counted. When the ball launch unit 66 is driven and a ball is launched, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the counting device 111. The counting device 111 updates the ball feed flag 213k based on the ball feed signal and the ball launch signal, and the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 based on the value of the ball feed flag 213k. Determine whether or not.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main process executed by the counting device 111 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the counting device 111. This main process is different from the main process executed by the counting device 111 in the second embodiment (first embodiment) in that the processes of S3601 to S3604 are added.

  In the main process in the third embodiment, the processes of S3601 to S3604 are executed in the remaining time of the regular process with a period of 1 ms. In the remaining time, when it is determined that the cylinder lock 21a is not rotated clockwise in front view according to the determination in S1908 (S1908: No), the cylinder lock 21a is turned clockwise in front view according to the determination in S1908. After it is determined that the rotation has been performed (S1908: Yes) and the door frame opening process (S1909) is executed, the process of S3601 is executed.

  In the process of S3601, it is determined whether or not a ball feed signal is received from the launch control device 112 (S3601). As a result, if the ball feed signal is received (S3601: Yes), the ball feed flag 213k is set to ON (S3602), and the process proceeds to S3603. If the ball feed signal is not received (S3601). : No), the process proceeds to S3603. In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not a ball launch signal is received from the launch control device 112 (S3603). As a result, if a ball launch signal is received (S3603: Yes), the ball feed flag 213k is set to OFF (S3604), and the process proceeds to S1910. If a ball feed signal is not received (S3604). : No), the process proceeds to S1910.

  As described above, in the counting device 111, the processing of S3601 to S3604 is repeatedly executed within the remaining time of the periodic processing with a period of 1 ms, so that the ball feeding signal and the ball firing signal transmitted from the ball launching device 112 are converted. Based on this, the ball feed flag 213k can be updated. Therefore, the counting device 111 can determine whether or not the ball is being sent to the ball launching unit 66 by the ball feed switch 213k.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a ball collection process, which is one process of the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, by the counting device 111 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the ball collection process. This ball collection process is different from the ball collection process executed by the counting device 111 in the second embodiment (first embodiment). When the ball collection process is executed, first, the ball feed flag 213k is turned on. Whether or not (S3701).

  If the ball feed flag 213k is on (S3701: Yes), the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 and is not fired but kept in the ball launch unit 66 before the power is turned off. After the ball feed flag 213k is set to OFF (S3702), the process proceeds to S3001, and the launch control device 112 is instructed to launch one ball (S3001). Upon receiving a ball launch instruction for one ball, the launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 only once without supplying the ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (ball feed). As a result, the ball that is not fired before the power is turned off and is held in the ball launching unit 66 is launched toward the game area.

  Then, it waits for 30 seconds (S3002). Thereby, the ball fired by the process of S3001 flows down the game board 13 and enters the winning port 3, 4, 5a or the out port 6. Here, the ball that has entered the ball is stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320. After the process of S3002, the process proceeds to S3003.

  On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3701 is that the ball feed flag 213k is off (S3701: No), the processes of S3702, S3001, and S3002 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3003. That is, before the power is turned off, if the sphere is not retained in the sphere launch unit 66, the process proceeds to S3003 as it is without driving the sphere launch unit 66.

  In this way, the counting device 111 executes the ball collection process shown in FIG. 57, so that the ball sent to the ball launching unit 66 at the time of power-off is fired only when the ball is left unfired. Since the unit 66 is driven and the sphere is fired, it is possible to prevent the sphere launch unit 66 from being unnecessarily driven when no sphere remains.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the same effect as the effect of the pachinko machine 10 in the corresponding embodiment is obtained by the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Play.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, after the ball is sent to the ball launching unit 66, if the power is turned off before the ball is launched, the sent ball is not fired. When the ball is fired, the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48 detects the ball, and 1 is added to the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c as a ball not used in the game. explained.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, after the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66, the power is turned off before the ball is launched (that is, the launch control device 112 is set to the counting device 111). Upon receiving a power-off command, the launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 to launch the ball with a launch strength sufficient to be a foul ball, and the ball is passed through the foul ball path 64. Return to the supply passage 65. Then, 1 is added to the possessed ball counter 213a and 1 is added to the circulating ball number memory 213c.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a firing control process executed by the firing control device 112 in the fourth embodiment. The difference between the launch control process in the fourth embodiment and the launch control process in the second embodiment (see FIG. 53) is that, in the second embodiment, first, the counting device 111 performs a one-sphere operation by the processes in S3501 and S3502. When a ball launch instruction is issued, the ball launch unit 66 is driven to launch a ball held in the ball launch unit 66 before power interruption. In the fourth embodiment, in S3501 and S3502, The process is omitted.

  In the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the power-off command is received from the counting device 111 based on the determination in S3507 executed after the process of sending the ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (S3506). (S3507: No), the point which returns to the process of S3503 after performing the process of S3801, S3802, is different from 2nd Embodiment.

  In the process of S3801, the ball launching unit 66 is driven with the launch strength to be a foul ball (S3801). Thereby, after the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66, if the power is cut off before the ball is launched (that is, when the launch control device 112 receives the power-off command from the counting device 111), the ball launch. The sphere sent to the unit 66 becomes a foul sphere and returns to the supply passage 65 through the foul sphere passage 64.

  Then, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the counting device 111 (S3802), and the process returns to S3503. The counting device 111 detects that the sphere transmitted to the sphere launching unit 112 has been returned to the supply passage 65 as a foul sphere based on the sphere launch signal transmitted by the process of S3802, and the counting device 111 stores 1 in the possessed sphere counter 213a. In addition, a process of adding 1 to the circulating ball number memory 213c is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a ball collection process executed by the counting device 111 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the ball collection process. The ball collection process in the fourth embodiment is different from the ball collection process in the second embodiment (see FIG. 41). In the second embodiment, when the ball collection process is executed, first, one ball is launched. Is issued to the launch control device 112 (S3001), and then a process of waiting for 30 seconds (S3002) is executed. However, in the fourth embodiment, the processes of S3001 and S3002 are omitted.

  In the fourth embodiment, after the ball is sent to the ball launching unit 66, when the power is turned off before the ball is launched (that is, when the launch control device 112 receives a power-off command from the counting device 111). The launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 so as to launch the ball with a launch strength sufficient to be a foul ball, and returns the ball to the supply passage 65 via the foul ball path 64. That is, in the fourth embodiment, when the power is turned off, the sphere is not retained in the sphere launch unit 66. Therefore, in the ball collection process, which is one of the start-up processes executed by the counting device 111 when the power is turned on, S3001, for launching a ball held in the ball launch unit 66 when the power is cut off. The process of S3002 can be omitted. Therefore, since the start-up process can be completed quickly, the counting process 111 can speed up the counting of the possessed ball and the number of circulating balls, and as a result, the timing at which the game can be started after the power is turned on. Can do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the main process executed by the counting device 111 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process in the fourth embodiment is different from the main process in the second embodiment (see FIG. 42) in the case where it is determined by the process in S1907 that the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. In other words, when the occurrence of power-off is detected (S1907: Yes), a power-off command is transmitted to the launch control device 112 (S1912), and then a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1913). The point is that the processes of S3901 and S3902 are executed before performing the above.

  In the process of S3901, after the power-off command is transmitted to the launch control apparatus 112 in the process of S1912, whether or not the launch control apparatus 112 receives a ball launch signal within a predetermined time (10 milliseconds in this embodiment). Is determined (S3901). As a result, if a ball launch signal is not received within 10 milliseconds (S3901: No), the process proceeds to S1913. On the other hand, if the ball launch signal is received within 10 milliseconds (S3901: Yes), the power is turned off after the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 and before the ball is launched (that is, the launch control device). 112 receives a power-off command from the counting device 111), the firing control device 112 drives the ball firing unit 66 so that the ball is launched with a launch strength sufficient to be a foul ball, and the foul ball path 64 This means that the ball has been returned to the supply passage 65 via. Therefore, in this case (S3901: Yes), a process of adding 1 to the possessed ball counter 213a and 1 to the circulating ball number memory 213c is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to S1913.

  The possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are decremented by 1 when a ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 toward the ball launch unit 66 (the ball is sent). After being sent, the power is turned off before the ball is fired (that is, the fire control device 112 receives a power-off command from the counting device 111), so that the ball returns to the supply passage 65 as a foul ball. If it is not used for the game, the values of the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c can be returned to the correct values by the processing of S3901 and S3902. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a ball that has not been used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a, and to protect the player's profit. In addition, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 (the number of circulating spheres) can be correctly counted, and it is possible to suppress the notification of an error even though a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the supply passage 65. .

  Also, in the process of S3901, after the power-off command is transmitted to the launch control apparatus 112 in the process of S1912, it is determined whether or not the launch control apparatus 112 has received a ball launch signal after waiting for a maximum of 10 milliseconds. Therefore, when a power interruption occurs, it is possible to reliably receive or not receive a ball launch signal while a voltage sufficient to cause the counting device 111 to operate normally is continuously applied.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment, there exists the same effect as the effect show | played by the pachinko machine 10 in corresponding embodiment by the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 in either of 1st-3rd embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 5th Embodiment is demonstrated centering on the point which is different from the pachinko machine 10 in 4th Embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the fourth embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, after the ball is sent to the ball launching unit 66, if the power is turned off before the ball is launched (that is, the launch control device 112 receives a power-off command from the counting device 111). ), The launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 so as to launch the ball with a launch strength enough to be a foul sphere (S3801 in FIG. 58), and then the ball launch signal is counted by the counting device. 111 (S3802 in FIG. 58). The counting device 111 performs a process of adding 1 to the possessed ball counter 213a and adding 1 to the circulating ball number memory 213c based on the reception of the ball emission signal.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, after the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66, if the power is turned off before the ball is launched (that is, the launch control device 112 receives a power-off command from the counting device 111). ), The launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 to launch the ball with a launch strength sufficient to be a foul sphere, but then sends a ball launch signal as in the fourth embodiment. Not transmitted to the counting device 111. On the other hand, in the counting device 111 of the fifth embodiment, after transmitting the power-off command to the firing control device 112, it is determined whether or not the foul ball detection switch 93 is turned on within a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 5 seconds). When the foul ball detection switch 93 is turned on within 5 seconds, 1 is added to the possessed ball counter 213a and 1 is added to the circulating ball number memory 213c.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a firing control process executed by the firing control device 112 in the fifth embodiment. The launch control process in the fifth embodiment is different from the launch control process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 58). In the process of S3801, the ball launch unit 66 is driven with the launch strength that becomes a foul ball. Thereafter, the process of S3802 (the process of transmitting the ball emission signal to the counting device 111) performed in the embodiment of FIG. 4 is omitted, and the process returns to the process of S3503. The other points are the same as the launch control process in the fourth embodiment.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the counting device 111 in the fifth embodiment. The main process in the fifth embodiment is different from the main process in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 60) in the case where it is determined by the process in S1907 that the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the occurrence of a power cut is detected (S1907: Yes), a power cut command is transmitted to the launch control device 112 (S1912), and the launch control device 112 receives a ball launch signal within 10 milliseconds. Instead of the process of S3901 for determining whether or not, the process of S3911 is executed.

  In the process of S3911, it is determined whether or not the foul ball detection switch 93 is turned on within 5 seconds after the power-off command is transmitted to the launch control device 112 in the process of S1912 (S3911). As a result, if the foul ball detection switch 93 is not turned on within 5 seconds (S3911: No), the process proceeds to S1913. On the other hand, if the foul ball detection switch 93 is turned on within 5 seconds (S3911: Yes), the ball is sent to the ball launching unit 66, and then the power is turned off before the ball is launched (ie, launching). When the control device 112 receives a power-off command from the counting device 111), the launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 to launch the ball with a launch strength that is enough to be a foul ball. This means that the ball has been returned to the supply passage 65 via the passage 64. Therefore, in this case (S3911: Yes), a process of adding 1 to the possessed ball counter 213a and adding 1 to the circulating ball number memory 213c is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to S1913.

  The possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are decremented by 1 when a ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 toward the ball launch unit 66 (the ball is sent). After being sent, the power is turned off before the ball is fired (that is, the fire control device 112 receives a power-off command from the counting device 111), so that the ball returns to the supply passage 65 as a foul ball. If it is not used in the game, the values of the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulation ball number memory 213c can be returned to the correct values by the processing of S3911, S3902. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a ball that has not been used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a, and to protect the player's profit. In addition, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 (the number of circulating spheres) can be correctly counted, and it is possible to suppress the notification of an error even though a predetermined number of spheres are stored in the supply passage 65. .

  In the process of S3911, since the detection result of the foul ball detection switch 93 is used, the power is turned off after the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 and before the ball is launched (that is, launch control). When the device 112 receives the power-off command from the counting device 111), it is possible to reliably detect a ball that has been returned to the supply passage 65 as a foul ball and has not been used in the game.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in 5th Embodiment, there exists the same effect as the effect show | played by the pachinko machine 10 in corresponding embodiment by the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 in either of 1st-4th embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. The pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the ball launch unit 66 is driven unconditionally (regardless of whether or not a ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66). A sphere-only launch was performed.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, similarly to the third embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the ball launching unit 66 is used only when the ball supplied to the ball launching unit 66 is retained. To drive the remaining ball to the ball launch unit 66. Here, in the sixth embodiment, the launch control device 112 is provided with a ball feed flag 112a indicating whether or not the ball is being sent to the ball launch unit 66. Then, the counting device 111 reads the ball feed flag 112a provided in the launch control device 112 in the ball collection processing which is one of the startup processing executed when the power is turned on. Thereafter, from the value of the read ball feed flag 112a, it is determined that the ball has been sent to the ball launch unit 66, that is, the ball has been retained in the ball launch unit 66 due to the occurrence of power interruption. Then, the ball launching unit 66 is driven to cause the ball launching unit 66 to fire the remaining balls. Since the ball thus launched is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are incremented by one based on the detection.

  FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the counting device 111, the firing control device 112, and the card sand device 71 in the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, a ball feed flag 112a is provided in the launch control device 112, as compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment.

  The ball feed flag 112a is a flag indicating whether or not a ball is being sent to the ball launch unit 66. When the ball feed flag 112a is on, it indicates that a ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 and is off. In this case, it is indicated that the ball is not sent to the ball launch unit 66. When the ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (when the ball is fed), the launch control device 112 sets the ball feed flag 112a to ON, and drives the ball launch unit 66 to When fired, the ball feed flag 112a is set to OFF.

  The ball feed flag 112a is configured so that its value can be read directly from the counting device 111. The counting device 111 is a ball collecting process (see FIG. 56) that is executed when the power is turned on. ), The ball feed flag 112a is referred to. In addition, the ball feed flag 112a is provided in a nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory), a hard disk drive, etc., and is configured so that the value can be held even when the power is turned off. Yes.

  Therefore, the counting device 111 reads the ball feed flag 112a of the launch control device 112 in the ball collection process, and determines whether or not the value is on, so that the ball is launched into the ball launch unit 66 before the power is turned off. It is possible to determine whether or not the ball is fired and held in the ball launching unit 66 without being fired.

  That is, when a power failure is detected after supplying a ball to the ball launch unit 66 and before launching the ball, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In addition, the supplied ball is kept in the ball launch unit 66 without firing the ball.

  As described in the second embodiment, this is because when the ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 in order to launch the ball, the occurrence of the power interruption is detected as it is. Even when the ball supplied and driven is fired, the occurrence of the power interruption is detected, and thereafter, the general winning switch 44, the starting winning switch 45, and the specific winning switch 46 do not detect the ball, and a prize accompanying the winning is obtained. No ball is played, i.e., this launched ball is not used in the game.

  In addition, when the power is cut off, the winning ball detection switch 47 that detects the balls that have won the various winning holes 3, 4, and 5a, and the out ball detection switch 48 that detects the balls that have entered the out port 6 are also normally used. Even if a ball enters the winning holes 3, 4, 5a and the out port 6 after the power is cut off after the power is cut off, the ball is discharged to the discharge passage 42 as it is. This is because the number of balls that have not been used in the game may not be correctly recognized after the power is cut off.

  On the other hand, when a ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are decremented by one. Therefore, if the number of balls returned to the supply passage 65 without being used in the game cannot be correctly recognized, the values of the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c cannot be updated to the correct values, and thus were not used in the game. Nevertheless, the value of the possessed ball counter 213a decreases, causing a player's disadvantage, or the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 (the number of circulating balls) cannot be counted correctly, so an error is notified. There was a risk of being.

  Therefore, in this pachinko machine 10, when a power-off command is received from the counting device 111 after the ball is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 and before the ball is launched, the supplied ball is not fired. While the ball launching unit 66 is retained, if the ball is retained in the ball launching unit 66 when the power is turned on again, the ball launching unit 66 is driven to remove the retained ball. Fire.

  Here, when a ball is supplied to the ball launch unit 66, in the present pachinko machine 10, the launch control device 112 sets the ball feed flag 112a on. Then, when a power interruption is detected and the supplied ball is kept in the ball launching unit 66 without firing the ball, the power is completely turned off while the ball feed flag 112a is kept on. As described above, the ball feed flag 112a remains on while the power is turned off. Therefore, in the ball collection process, if the ball feed flag 112a is on, the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 and is not fired but is held in the ball launch unit 66 before the power is turned off. Judgment can be made.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, in the ball collection process, only when the ball feed flag 112a is on, that is, the ball sent to the ball launch unit 66 before the power is turned off is launched. The ball launching unit 66 is driven to fire the remaining ball to the ball launching unit 66 only when the ball launching unit 66 is retained. Since the ball that has been fired here is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48, based on the detection, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c are incremented by 1, thereby playing the game. It is possible to protect the player's profit by preventing the balls not used in the game from being decremented from the possessed ball counter 213a, or to suppress the error notification by correctly counting the number of circulating balls.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the ball is fired only when the ball sent to the ball launching unit 66 at the time of power-off is not fired, so that no ball remains. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball launch unit 66 from being driven in vain.

  Note that the ball feed flag 112a may be provided in a RAM configured to be able to hold data even when the power is turned off by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the firing control process executed by the firing control device 112 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this launch control process. This launch control process is similar to the launch control process in the second embodiment (FIG. 53), and touches that the player is touching the operation handle 39 when the counting device 111 is permitted to launch a ball. Control for supplying (ball feeding) a ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66 on condition that the stop switch 39b for detecting the sensor 39a and stopping the ball firing is off (not operated). Then, the ball launching unit 66 is driven, and the ball is fired at the launch intensity corresponding to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle. Further, when there is an instruction to fire one ball from the counting device 111, the ball launching unit 66 is controlled to be driven without supplying the ball to the ball launching unit 66 from the supply passage 65 (without feeding the ball). Do.

  The launch control process in the sixth embodiment is different from the launch control process in the second embodiment. First, when a ball launch instruction for one ball is received from the counting device 111 based on the determination in S3501 (S3501: Yes) After the ball launch unit is driven by the process of S3502 (S3502), the ball feed flag 112a is set to OFF (S4001), and the process proceeds to S3503. Thereby, it is indicated by the ball feed flag 112a that the ball is not sent to the launch unit 66. If it is determined in S3501 that there is no one-ball launch instruction from the counting device 111 (S3501: No), the processing of S3502 and S4001 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3503.

  The launch control process in the sixth embodiment is different from the launch control process in the second embodiment. Second, a sphere is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the sphere launch unit 66 by the process of S3506 (sphere Is sent), the ball feed flag 112a is set to ON (S4002), and the process proceeds to S3507. Third, when the ball launch unit 66 is driven and the ball sent to the ball launch unit 66 is fired by the processing of S3508, the ball feed flag 112a is set to OFF (S4003), and S3509. It is a point which transfers to the process of.

  In this way, the launch control device 112 can indicate whether or not the ball is being sent to the ball launch unit 66 based on the value of the ball feed flag 112a by executing the launch control process. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a ball collection process which is one process of the start-up process executed when the power is turned on by the counting device 111 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the ball collection process. This ball collection process is different from the ball collection process executed by the counting device 111 in the second embodiment (first embodiment). When the ball collection process is executed, first, the ball of the launch control device 112 is used. The feed flag 112a is read and it is determined whether or not the value is on (S4011).

  If the ball feed flag 112a is on (S4011: Yes), before the power is turned off, the ball is sent to the ball launch unit 66 and is not fired, but is kept in the ball launch unit 66. The process proceeds to S3001, and the launch controller 112 is instructed to launch one ball (S3001). Upon receiving a ball launch instruction for one ball, the launch control device 112 drives the ball launch unit 66 only once without supplying the ball from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (ball feed). As a result, the ball that is not fired before the power is turned off and is held in the ball launching unit 66 is launched toward the game area.

  Then, it waits for 30 seconds (S3002). Thereby, the ball fired by the process of S3001 flows down the game board 13 and enters the winning port 3, 4, 5a or the out port 6. Here, the ball that has entered the ball is stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320. After the process of S3002, the process proceeds to S3003.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4011, if the ball feed flag 112a is off (S4011: No), the processes of S3001 and S3002 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3003. That is, before the power is turned off, if the sphere is not retained in the sphere launch unit 66, the process proceeds to S3003 as it is without driving the sphere launch unit 66.

  In this way, the counting device 111 executes the ball collection process shown in FIG. 65, so that the ball sent to the ball launching unit 66 at the time of power-off is fired only when the ball is held without being fired. Since the unit 66 is driven and the sphere is fired, it is possible to prevent the sphere launch unit 66 from being unnecessarily driven when no sphere remains.

  In the sixth embodiment, instead of the counting device 111, a ball feed flag 112a is provided in the launch control device 112 that directly controls the ball feed to the ball launch unit 66 and the ball launch by the ball launch unit 66. The control device 112 monitors whether or not a ball has been sent to the ball launch unit 66. Thus, it is possible to accurately monitor whether or not the ball is being sent to the ball launching unit 66.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in 6th Embodiment, there exists the same effect as the effect show | played by the pachinko machine 10 in corresponding embodiment by the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 in either of 1st-5th embodiment.

  Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in 7th Embodiment is demonstrated centering on the difference from the pachinko machine 10 in 1st Embodiment. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those in the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a transmission method of commands and signals (hereinafter referred to as “commands”) transmitted and received between the control devices of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. In the first embodiment, reference is not made to a transmission method of commands and the like transmitted / received between the respective control devices. However, in the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. A differential transmission system is adopted as the transmission system. Each command is transmitted serially bit by bit using this differential transmission method.

  The differential transmission method is a method of transmitting data using two signal lines (first signal line and second signal line). Reverse transfer signals are transmitted to the first signal line and the second signal line, respectively. Specifically, when the data is “0”, both the first signal line and the second signal line are transmitted at 2.1V, and when the data is “1”, 2 is sent to the first signal line. .5V and data are transmitted to the second signal line as 1.7V.

  On the receiving side, whether the data is “0” or “1” is determined from the potential difference between the first signal line and the second signal line. That is, ideally, the potential difference between the first signal line and the second signal line when the data is “0” is 0 V, and the first signal line and the second signal line when the data is “1”. The potential difference is 0.8V. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the potential difference between the first signal line and the second signal line is 0.6 V or more, the transmitted data is determined to be “1”, and the first signal line and the second signal line are Is less than 0.6V, it is determined that the transmitted data is “0”.

  In this way, by using the differential transmission method for transmission / reception of each command and the like, when an unauthorized substrate is connected to the wiring connecting the control devices, it is possible to suppress unauthorized acts caused by the unauthorized substrate. Specifically, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of transmitting a command or the like advantageous to the player from the unauthorized board to the wiring connecting the control devices. The command that is advantageous to the player is, for example, a possessed ball addition command for increasing the player's possessed ball with winning. Also, in the gaming machine that notifies the player of the operation timing for a big hit in the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 when a predetermined command is received from the main control device 110, the operation This is a predetermined command that triggers timing display. The fraudulent board is advantageous to the player by transmitting a command or the like advantageous to the player to the wiring connecting the control devices even though each control device does not normally transmit the command. Create a state.

  In the case of a conventional gaming machine that transmits data using only one signal line in the wiring connecting the control devices, an illegal command (for illegal action) is used for the one signal line. It is only necessary to transmit a command transmitted from an unauthorized board, and an unauthorized command can be transmitted easily.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment transmits data using two signal lines, so that it is not necessary to know that the data transmission method is a differential transmission method. When trying to transmit only to the signal lines, the two signal lines do not have opposite phase signals, and the transmitted data is abnormal data. Therefore, in this case, since an illegal command is not accepted, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed. In addition, when an illegal person creates an illegal board, the illegal person must create the illegal board so that data can be transmitted to the two signal lines by a differential transmission method. It is possible to increase the difficulty of creating an illegal board and reduce the willingness to create an illegal board. Thereby, cheating itself can be suppressed.

  Also, the differential transmission method is resistant to common mode noise because it determines whether the transmitted data is “0” or “1” from the potential difference between the first signal line and the second signal line. The common mode noise is in-phase noise superimposed on two signal lines (the first signal line and the second signal line), and the common mode noise superimposed on the two signal lines is the first signal line. And the second signal line are erased when the potential difference is seen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to common mode noise.

  In the differential transmission method, even if the amplitude of each of the first signal line and the second signal line is reduced, it is determined whether the data transmitted by the potential difference of each signal line is “0” or “1”. Therefore, the signal amplitude can be reduced as compared with the single-end transmission method in which data is transmitted through one signal line. Therefore, in the differential transmission method, the signal frequency can be increased. Therefore, even if the bit length of a command or the like is long, it is not necessary to transmit a signal in parallel, and it can be transmitted serially bit by bit. Therefore, even if the differential transmission method is a method of transmitting one signal with two signal lines as a pair, it is not necessary to transmit many signals in parallel, and data is transmitted with a small number of signal lines as a whole. it can.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in 7th Embodiment, there exists the same effect as the effect show | played by the pachinko machine 10 in corresponding embodiment by the structure same as the pachinko machine 10 in either of the 1st-6th embodiment.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Moreover, the numerical value quoted in each said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value.

  In each of the above embodiments, based on the elapsed time since the ball was last launched, it is determined whether all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65, and in that state, the supply passage The case where it is determined whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 has changed by checking the number of spheres stored in 65 has been described. On the other hand, instead of performing the determination of the state where all the balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65 based on the elapsed time since the last ball was launched, for example, The rotation operation amount of the operation handle 39 or the detection result of the touch sensor 39a provided on the operation handle 39 is configured to be input to the counting device 111, and the elapsed time since the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 39 is determined to be zero. Alternatively, it may be performed based on the elapsed time after the operation handle 39 is not touched by the player from the detection result of the touch sensor 39a. Further, the driving signal of the ball launch unit 66 from the launch control device 112 is input to the counting device 111, and the pachinko machine is based on the elapsed time after the drive signal for firing the ball in the ball launch unit 66 disappears. The state in which all the spheres circulating in 10 should be stored in the supply passage 65 may be determined.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is confirmed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the last sphere was launched, but it is not necessarily 30 seconds, After a sphere is supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66, it is fired by the ball launch unit 66, flows down the front area of the game board 13, and after a sufficient time has passed to return to the supply passage 65 again, The number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 may be confirmed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the cylinder lock 21a is rotated and the unlocking of the door frame 14 is instructed, the launch of the ball is stopped, and after 30 seconds have elapsed, the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99 is stopped. In the above description, the door frame 14 is unlocked by applying a voltage to the door. However, the door frame 14 need not be unlocked when 30 seconds have elapsed after the ball has been stopped. After being supplied from the passage 65 to the ball launching unit 66, the electronic lock 99 is fired after a sufficient time has passed before it is fired by the ball launching unit 66, flows down the front area of the game board 13, and returns to the supply passage 65 again. The door frame 14 may be unlocked by applying a voltage to the solenoid 99b.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the door frame 14 is opened, the third ball number determination process (S2404) is performed before the door frame 14 is opened, and the number of balls circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is changed. Whether or not there is a difference, and also when the door frame 14 is closed from the open state, the fourth ball number determination process (S2408) is performed, and the determination result of the third ball number determination process (S2404) is obtained. However, the case where it is determined whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the pachinko machine 10 is not changed has been described, but the following configuration may be adopted. That is, the number of balls stored in the supply passage 65 confirmed in the third ball number determination process (S2404) is stored, and the fourth ball number determination process performed when the door frame 14 is closed. In (S2408), the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 confirmed in the fourth ball number determination process (S2408) is determined as the supply passage 65 confirmed in the third ball number determination process (S2404). If the number of balls is different from the number of balls stored in the door, it may be determined that the ball has been touched while the door frame 14 is opened, and the notification may be made. As a result, even if a person other than those involved in the hall unlocks the door frame 14 and performs a fraudulent act of adding or removing a ball, the fraudulent act regarding the ball performed while the door frame 14 is opened Can be easily found by hall personnel.

  In each of the above embodiments, while the door frame 14 is opened, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is not particularly confirmed, but this is during the door frame 14 is opened. However, based on the detection results of the 51-ball detection switch 91 and the 50-ball detection switch 92, the number of spheres stored in the supply passage 65 is continuously checked. When the number changes or when it is determined that a number of spheres different from the number to be stored in the supply passage 65 are stored in the supply passage 65, the fact may be notified. As a result, even if a person trying to cheat opens the door frame 14 and adds a sphere to the supply passage 65, or pulls out a stored sphere from the supply passage 65 using any method, It is possible to immediately notify hall personnel that such an illegal act has been performed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the opening of the door frame 14 is instructed by the rotation operation of the cylinder lock 21a, the third ball number determination process (S2404) is performed before the door frame 14 is opened, and the pachinko machine 10 The case where the door frame 14 is opened unconditionally after determining whether or not the number of spheres circulating in the vehicle is unchanged has been described. Instead, in the third ball number determination process, the interior of the pachinko machine 10 is When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the number of spheres that circulate, a voltage may not be applied to the solenoid 99b of the electronic lock 99, and the door frame 14 may not be opened. Thereby, when the error notification is performed before the door frame 14 is opened, it is possible to prevent the error from being canceled by a person other than the hall related person or the evidence of fraudulent activity being hidden. In this case, an unlock button for the door frame 14 is provided on the back side of the inner frame 14 so that the door frame 14 is not unlocked unless the unlock button is pressed when the door frame 14 is not opened. May be. Alternatively, the counting device 111 is configured to receive the door frame unlock signal from the hall computer, and if the door frame 14 is not opened, the door frame 14 is unlocked unless the door frame unlock signal is received from the hall computer. It may not be locked. Thereby, even when an error is notified and the door frame 14 is not opened, the hall personnel can easily open the door frame 14.

  In the first embodiment, when a ball is launched toward the game board 13 and one possessed ball is consumed, in the update of the possessed ball counter 213 a, the launched ball passes through the ball guide passage 60 and the game board. When it is detected by the gaming ball detection switch 68a that the ball has been guided to the upper part of 13, the possessed ball counter 213a is decremented by 1 (S2310 in FIG. 28). That is, in the first embodiment, the possessed ball counter 213a is decremented by 1, assuming that the ball is consumed when the ball is guided to the top of the game board 13. In contrast, as in the second embodiment, when the ball feed detection switch 94 detects that a ball has been supplied from the supply passage 65 to the ball launch unit 66 (ball sent), the ball is consumed. As a result, the possessed ball counter 213a may be decremented by 1. Unless there is a special circumstance that the power is cut off, if the ball is fed, the sent ball is fired and used for the game. Therefore, by updating the possessed sphere when the ball feed is detected, it is possible to reflect the sphere consumed without delay in the possessed sphere counter 203a.

  In the second to sixth embodiments, the operation of the all-sleep button 301 is enabled and the game progresses only when there is a situation in which it is impossible to fire a circulating ball due to an abnormality such as a clogged ball. The case of temporarily stopping has been described. Instead, when a predetermined error occurs, the operation of the all-sleep button 301 is enabled to temporarily stop the progress of the game, and the operation of the all-sleep button 301 is always enabled to advance the game. It may be temporarily stopped.

  In the second, third, and sixth embodiments, when power-off is detected, the balls that have been won to the general winning port 3, the starting winning port 4, and the specific winning port 5a thereafter are upstream of the winning ball detection switch 47. Is temporarily stopped by the winning ball side stopping device 310, and the ball that has entered the out port 6 after the power-off is detected is temporarily stopped by the out ball side stopping device 320 upstream of the out ball detecting switch 48. Stopped. In addition, when a power failure is detected after the sphere is supplied to the sphere launch unit 66 and before the sphere is launched, the sphere is not fired and the supplied sphere is retained in the sphere launch unit 66. . Then, when the power is turned on again, first, the ball held in the ball launching unit 66 is fired and stopped at either the winning ball side stopping device 310 or the out ball side stopping device 320, and then The balls stopped by the winning ball side stopping device 310 and the out ball side stopping device 320 are caused to flow down, and the balls detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48 are regarded as balls not used in the game. The number of balls is added to the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again, first, the balls stopped by the winning ball side stopping device 310 and the out ball side stopping device 320 are caused to flow down, and the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48 is used. The detected balls are added to the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c as the number of balls not used in the game, and then the winning ball side stopping device 310 and the out ball side stopping device 320 are added. The ball distribution plates 311 and 321 are moved to the non-stationary side, and the ball held in the ball launch unit 66 is fired and detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48. Alternatively, 1 may be added to the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c as a ball that has not been used in the game.

  In the third embodiment or the sixth embodiment, if a power failure is detected after the sphere is supplied to the sphere launch unit 66 and before the sphere is fired, the sphere is not fired and supplied. When the ball is held in the ball launch unit 66 and the power is turned on again, the ball is supplied only when the ball supplied to the ball launch unit 66 is kept based on the values of the ball feed flags 213k and 112a. The case where the launch unit 66 is driven and the remaining sphere is fired by the sphere launch unit 66 has been described. On the other hand, a sensor for detecting a sphere is disposed at a position where the sphere supplied to the sphere launch unit 66 is retained, and when the power is turned on again, the sphere is retained in the sphere launch unit 66 by the sensor. It may be determined whether or not the ball is held, and if the ball is retained, the ball launch unit 66 may be driven to cause the ball launch unit 66 to fire the remaining ball. Since it is determined by the sensor whether or not the sphere supplied to the sphere launch unit 66 is retained, the determination can be made more reliably. In this case, when the launched ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48, 1 may be added to the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulation ball number memory 213c, or the ball launch At the stage when the unit 66 is driven to fire the ball that has been retained, 1 may be added to the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c. In the former case, it is possible to update the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c after confirming that the ball launching unit 66 retained when the power is turned off has been reliably fired. In the latter case, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c can be updated by simple processing without looking at the detection result of the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48.

  In the third or sixth embodiment, when the power is turned on again, the ball supplied to the ball launch unit 66 is retained based on the values of the ball feed flags 213k and 112a. As long as the ball launch unit 66 is driven, the remaining balls are fired, and when the fired ball is detected by the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball are detected. One is added to the number memory 213c. On the other hand, 1 may be added to the possessed sphere counter 213a and the circulation sphere number memory 213c at the stage where the sphere launch unit 66 is driven to fire the retained ball. Thus, the possessed ball counter 213a and the circulating ball number memory 213c can be updated by simple processing without looking at the detection result of the winning ball detection switch 47 or the out ball detection switch 48.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, processes such as a fluctuation process, a prize ball process, and a start winning process are executed. This processing may be executed in the regular processing (processing executed every 4 milliseconds) of the main processing (FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the above embodiment, the jackpot control process is executed in the regular process of the main process (FIG. 20) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and this is executed by the timer executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. You may make it perform in an interruption process (FIG. 13).

  In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device.

  Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, various flags are generated instead of the commands generated by the sound lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flags. Thus, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be controlled.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where one start winning opening 4 for starting a jackpot lottery when a ball enters the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) winning winning openings at which a winning ball is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a hold at each start winning prize port, the main ball number command that the main control device 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 includes information indicating which start winning hole is held. Also good. In addition, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may include information indicating which variation effect is held by which start winning award. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each start winning opening and a held ball number command is received, the reserved ball for the starting winning hole indicated by the held ball number command is stored. When the number of held balls is set in the number counter and a variation pattern command is received, the number of held balls is counted for each start winning port by subtracting one from the reserved ball number counter for the starting winning port indicated in the variation pattern command. be able to.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning winning opening 4 and the passing through the through gate 7 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times. You may set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of the suspended balls in the variable display based on the winning to the start winning opening 4 is different in the part of the 3rd symbol display device 81 by the number or the area divided into four by the number of the retained balls. (For example, a color or lighting pattern) may be displayed, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 87, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for ball launching. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

  Storage means for storing game media, launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means, recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and game media recovered by the recovery means A game machine that plays a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, wherein the number of game media stored in the storage device is determined. 1 determining means and when the predetermined number of game media circulating in the gaming machine are all to be stored in the storing means, the storing means determined by the first determining means stores in the storing means A second judging means for judging whether or not the number of game media being played is the predetermined number, and the number of game media stored in the storing means being different from the predetermined number by the second judging means. Is If it is determined, the gaming machine characterized in that it and a notification unit for performing a predetermined notification A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the game medium is stored by the storage unit, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is launched by the launch unit, the game medium launched by the launch unit is collected by the collection unit, and the collection The game medium collected by the means is discharged by the discharge means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. The number of game media stored by the storage means is determined by the first determination means. When the predetermined number of game media circulating in the gaming machine is to be stored in the storage unit, the number of game media stored in the storage unit determined by the first determination unit is Whether the number is a predetermined number is determined by the second determination means. As a result, when it is determined by the second determination means that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, the notification means performs a predetermined notification. As a result, even if an illegal act or trouble occurs during a game and the number of gaming media circulating in the gaming machine changes, all the predetermined number of gaming media circulating in the gaming machine When it becomes a state to be stored in the storage means, it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, and predetermined notification is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the number of game media circulating in the game machine can be recognized at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the time required from when one game medium is launched by the launching means until it is collected by the collecting means and discharged to the storing means by the discharging means is stored as the first time. The gaming machine counts the elapsed time since the game medium is fired by the launching means, and counts the game medium fired immediately before by the launching means by the first counting means. And a third judging means for judging whether or not the elapsed time since the firing has become the first time or more, wherein the second judging means is a game medium that has been fired immediately before by the firing means. When the third determining means determines that the elapsed time counted from the first counting means is equal to or longer than the first time, the circuit is circulated in the gaming machine. The number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means is the predetermined number, assuming that the predetermined number of game media to be stored in the storage means A game machine A2 characterized by determining whether or not.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the time required for one game medium to be collected by the collecting means and discharged to the storing means by the discharging means and stored is set as the first time, it is immediately released by the emitting means. When the third determining means determines that the elapsed time from the launch of the played game medium counted by the first counting means is equal to or longer than the first time, it circulates in the gaming machine. Assuming that all of the predetermined number of game media are to be stored in the storage means, a second determination is made as to whether the number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means is a predetermined number. Determined by means. Thereby, when the launch of the game medium is stopped for the first time or more, it is determined whether the number of the game media stored in the storage means is a predetermined number, and the game media stored in the storage means When it is determined that the number is different from the predetermined number, the notification unit performs a predetermined notification. Therefore, even if an illegal act or trouble occurs during the game and the number of game media circulating in the machine changes, the timing when the player pauses the game or ends the game Thus, it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, and predetermined notification is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the number of game media circulating in the game machine can be recognized at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the time required from when one game medium is launched by the launching unit to when it is collected by the collecting unit and discharged to the storing unit by the discharging unit is stored as the first time. In this case, the gaming machine has a lottery means for performing lottery based on the game medium launched by the launching means, and a game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means And an effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect after giving a predetermined game value to the player by the game value providing means, and the launching by the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect executing means. Stop means for stopping the launch of the game medium by the means, wherein the second determination means is the first time after the stop of the launch of the game medium by the stop means. When the time has elapsed, the storage means determined by the first determination means determines that all of the predetermined number of game media circulating in the gaming machine should be stored in the storage means. It is determined whether or not the number of game media being played is the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, lottery is performed by the lottery unit based on the game medium launched by the launching unit, and a predetermined game value is given to the player by the game value granting unit based on the lottery result. Further, after the predetermined value is given to the player by the game value giving means, a predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, and the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means. The game medium is stopped by the stop means. Then, when it has been more than the first time since the launch of the game medium is stopped by the stop means, it is assumed that all the predetermined number of game media circulating in the game machine should be stored in the storage means. The second determination means determines whether the number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means is the predetermined number. Here, the first time is the time required for one game medium to be collected from the launching means, collected by the collecting means, discharged to the storing means by the discharging means, and stored. Thereby, the launch of the game medium is stopped together with the predetermined effect performed after the predetermined game value is given, and the game medium stored in the storage means when the first time or more has passed since the stop of the launch Is determined to be a predetermined number, and when it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, the notification means performs a predetermined notification. . Therefore, even if a fraudulent act or trouble occurs during a game and the number of game media circulating in the gaming machine changes, after the given game value that the player can take a breath of is given At the timing, it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, and predetermined notification is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the number of game media circulating in the game machine can be recognized at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine B1, the gaming machine B2 is characterized in that a length of time required for the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means is equal to or longer than the first time.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the predetermined effect executed after the predetermined game value is given to the player is executed by the effect execution means for the first time or more. Therefore, even if the release of the game medium is stopped by the stop means for the first time in order to make the determination by the second determination means, the predetermined effect can release the dissatisfaction that the release of the game medium is stopped. There is an effect that can be.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, and B2, when the game medium is continuously fired by the launching means, the number of games is at least smaller than the number of game media to be stored in the storage means A fourth determination unit configured to determine whether or not the medium is stored in the storage unit, and the notification unit is configured to release the game medium continuously by the emission unit by the fourth determination unit; A gaming machine C1 that performs a predetermined notification when it is determined that at least the number of game media to be stored in the storage means is stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, and B2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game medium is continuously being fired by the launching means, at least the number of game media to be stored in the storage means is stored in the storage means by the fourth determination means. If it is determined, the notification unit performs a predetermined notification. As a result, when an illegal act or trouble occurs during a game and the number of game media circulating in the gaming machine changes, the game medium is stored in the storage means in a situation where the game media are continuously fired. If it is determined that the number of game media that are currently stored is smaller than the number of game media that should be stored, a predetermined notification is issued. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the number of game media circulating in the game machine can be recognized at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine C1, the storage means is configured so that game media are stored in a line one by one, and at least stored in the storage means when the game media are continuously fired by the launching means. When the number of game media to be played is stored side by side, it is provided with detection means for detecting the presence of the game media at a position where the game media is always stored, and the fourth determination means is the detection means. On the basis of the detection result of, when the game medium is continuously being fired by the launching means, at least a number of game media to be stored in the storage means is stored in the storage means. It is determined whether or not the game machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means is configured so that game media are stored in a line one by one, and at least of the game media to be stored in the storage means when the game media are continuously fired by the launching means. When the numbers are stored side by side, a detecting means for detecting the presence of the game medium is provided at a position where the game medium is always stored. Then, the fourth determination means has a number smaller than the number of game media to be stored in the storage means when the game media are continuously fired by the launch means based on the detection result by the detection means. It is configured to determine whether or not the game medium is stored in the storage means. This makes it possible to determine whether or not at least the number of game media to be stored in the storage means is stored in the storage means when the game media are continuously being fired by the launching means. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to easily determine only by providing the detection means.

  In any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, and C2, when game media are continuously being fired by the launching means, the number is larger than the number of game media to be stored in the storing means A fifth judging means for judging whether or not a number of game media are stored in the storing means, wherein the notifying means has the game means continuously fired by the launching means by the fifth judging means; When it is determined that the number of game media to be stored in the storage means is larger than the number of game media stored in the storage means, a predetermined notification is performed. D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, and C2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the number of game media to be stored in the storage means is stored in the storage means when the game medium is continuously discharged by the launch means by the fifth determination means. If it is determined, a predetermined notification is given by the notification means. As a result, when an illegal act or trouble occurs during a game and the number of game media circulating in the gaming machine changes, the game medium is stored in the storage means in a situation where the game media are continuously fired. If it is determined that the number of game media that are currently stored is greater than the number of game media that should be stored, a predetermined notification is issued. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the number of game media circulating in the game machine can be recognized at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine D1, the storage means is configured to store game media one by one in a row, and is stored in the storage means when the game media are continuously fired by the launching means. When the number of game media to be stored is stored side by side, the game device is provided with detection means for detecting the presence of the game media at a position where the game media is not always stored, and the fifth determination unit is detected by the detection unit. Based on the result, when game media are continuously being fired by the launching means, whether more game media are stored in the storage means than the number of game media to be stored in the storage means A gaming machine D2 characterized by determining whether or not.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means is configured so that game media are stored in a line one by one, and the number of game media to be stored in the storage means when the game media are continuously fired by the launching means. When the game media are stored side by side, a detecting means for detecting the presence of the game media is provided at a position where the game media is not always stored. Then, the fifth determination means has a number of games larger than the number of game media to be stored in the storage means when the game media are continuously fired by the launch means based on the detection result by the detection means. Whether or not the medium is stored in the storage means is determined. Thereby, when the game medium is continuously being fired by the launching means, it is determined whether the number of game media to be stored in the storage means is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the determination can be easily made only by providing the detection means.

  A storage means for storing game media, a launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means toward a game area, a recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and a recovery means Discharging means for discharging the collected game media to the storage means, and a game machine for playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, wherein one game medium is launched by the launch means The game machine has a front frame that covers the front side of the gaming area when the time required for the first time to be collected by the collecting means and discharged to the storing means by the discharging means and stored is set as the first time. A key part for locking the front frame, an instruction receiving part for receiving an instruction to unlock the front frame by the key part, and when the unlocking instruction is received by the instruction receiving part, Stop means for stopping the launch of the game medium by the launch means, and when the unlocking instruction is received by the instruction receiving unit, and when the first time or more has elapsed since the stop of the release of the game medium by the stop means, Unlocking means for unlocking the locking of the front frame by the key portion, and a gaming machine E1.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the game medium is stored by the storage unit, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is launched by the launch unit toward the game area, and the game medium launched by the launch unit is collected by the collection unit. The game media collected and collected by the collection means are discharged by the discharge means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. Further, the gaming machine is provided with a front frame that covers the front side of the gaming area, and the front frame is locked by a key portion. Here, when the instruction receiving unit receives an instruction to unlock the front frame, the stop means stops the game medium. Then, when the first time or more has elapsed since the release of the game medium by the stop means was stopped, the locking of the front frame by the key part is unlocked by the unlock means. The first time is the time required for one game medium to be collected from the launching means until it is collected by the collecting means and discharged to the storing means by the discharging means and stored. Thereby, when the front frame is unlocked, all the game media launched in the game area are collected and stored in the storage means, so that even if the front frame is unlocked, the game medium launched in the game area Can't touch. Therefore, even if the front frame is unlocked during the game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress any illegal acts on the game medium.

  In the gaming machine E1, the unlocking instruction is received by the instruction receiving unit, and the period from the stop of the release of the game medium by the stopping means until the first time or more has elapsed, in a predetermined manner. A gaming machine E2 comprising display means for displaying.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the instruction receiving unit receives an instruction to unlock the front frame and displays the elapsed time in a predetermined manner from the time when the game medium is stopped by the stopping means until the first time has elapsed. Displayed on the means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the psychological burden felt during the waiting period by displaying the display means from when the unlocking instruction of the front frame is locked until it is actually unlocked. There is.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming medium is constituted by a non-magnetic member.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the gaming medium is constituted by a non-magnetic member, so that the gaming medium is played by a magnet until the front frame is unlocked. In this way, when the front frame is unlocked, it is possible to suppress the act of acting on the game medium held in the game area by the magnet.

  The gaming machine E4 according to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, wherein the key portion is configured to be electrically lockable and unlockable.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the key part is configured to be electrically locked and unlocked, so that the instruction receiving part accepts the unlocking instruction, The unlocking means for unlocking the locking of the front frame by the key portion after the first time or more has elapsed since the release of the game medium by the stopping means can be configured by electrical control. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration can be easily constructed.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the entire storage means is covered with a cover in a state where the front frame is opened.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the entire storage means is covered with the cover when the front frame is opened, so that the locking of the front frame is unlocked. Even when the front frame is opened and the game area is exposed, it is possible to prevent the game medium stored in the storage means from being touched. Therefore, even if the front frame is unlocked, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an illegal act on the game medium.

  In the gaming machine F1, the storage means includes a discharge means for discharging the game medium stored in the storage means to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the gaming medium stored in the storage unit can be discharged to the outside by the discharging unit. Therefore, even if the front frame is opened, the game medium can be taken out from the storage means covered with the cover, so that there is an effect that the state of the game medium can be checked or the game medium can be exchanged.

  In the gaming machine F2, the discharging means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F2, since the discharging means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the player can easily take out the game medium stored in the storing means from the discharging means. It is not possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from performing an illegal act on the game medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4 and F1 to F3, the unlocking instruction is received by the first determination unit that determines the number of game media stored in the storage unit and the instruction receiving unit, and the stop Whether or not the number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means is the predetermined number when the first time has elapsed since the launch of the game media by the means is stopped. A notification for performing a predetermined notification when the second determination means determines that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number. And a gaming machine G1.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4 and F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the game stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means when the unlocking instruction is received by the instruction receiving unit and the first medium has passed since the stop means has stopped firing the game medium. Whether the number of media is a predetermined number is determined by the second determination means. Here, when more than the first time has elapsed since the launching of the game medium by the stop means, all of the predetermined number of game media circulating in the game machine are to be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when it is determined by the second determination means that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, the notification means performs a predetermined notification. As a result, even if an illegal act or trouble occurs during a game and the number of gaming media circulating in the gaming machine changes, the inside of the gaming machine is triggered by the unlocking of the front frame. When all of the predetermined number of circulating game media are to be stored in the storage means, it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number. Is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the change in the number of game media circulating in the game machine can be recognized at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine G1, the second determination unit is a case where the first time has elapsed since the unlocking instruction is received by the instruction receiving unit and the launch of the game medium is stopped by the stop unit. Before unlocking the front frame by the unlocking means, it is determined whether the number of game media stored in the storing means determined by the first determining means is the predetermined number. A gaming machine G2 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the unlocking instruction is received by the instruction receiving unit and the launch of the game medium is stopped by the stopping unit, the unlocking unit unlocks the front frame after the first time has elapsed. Before the second determination means, it is determined whether the number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means is a predetermined number. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the front frame from being unlocked before it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage unit is different from the predetermined number and the predetermined notification is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the fraudulent performer from concealing evidence by eliminating the anomaly that has occurred in the number of game media circulating in the game machine before the predetermined notification is made.

  In the gaming machine G2, the unlocking means determines by the second determining means that the number of game media stored in the storing means determined by the first determining means is different from the predetermined number. When this is done, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the front frame is unlocked.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, the second judging means determines that the number of gaming media stored in the storing means judged by the first judging means is different from the predetermined number. If it is determined, the locking of the front frame by the unlocking means is not unlocked, so that the fraudster can eliminate the change that occurred in the number of game media circulating in the machine of the gaming machine. In addition, only predetermined notification is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the destruction of evidence can be prevented more reliably.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, F1 to F3, and G1 to G3, first determination means for determining the number of game media stored in the storage means, and locking of the front frame by the unlocking means Closing detection means for detecting that the front frame is closed after unlocking is performed, and when the closing detection means detects that the front frame is closed, the first determination means The sixth determination means for determining whether the number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the determination means is the predetermined number, and by the sixth determination means, the number of game media stored in the storage means A gaming machine H1 comprising: a notification means for performing a predetermined notification when it is determined that the number is different from the predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, F1 to F3, and G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, after the front frame is unlocked by the unlocking means, when the closing detection means detects that the front frame is closed, the front frame is stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means. It is determined by the sixth determination means whether the number of game media that are present is a predetermined number. As a result, when it is determined that the number of game media stored in the storage unit is different from the predetermined number, the predetermined notification is performed by the notification unit. Thereby, after the front frame is closed, it can be recognized that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number, and the game media stored in the storage means There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being started in an abnormal state.

  In the gaming machine E4, the key unit is configured such that the front frame cannot be unlocked while power is not turned on.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the front frame cannot be unlocked unless the power is turned on. There is an effect that the front frame can be unlocked in a state where there is no illegal action against the game medium.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, F1 to F3, G1 to G3, H1 and I1, a seventh number for determining the number of gaming media stored in the storing means while the front frame is unlocked. Notification means for performing a predetermined notification when the number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the determination means and the seventh determination means changes while the front frame is unlocked. A gaming machine J1 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, F1 to F3, G1 to G3, H1 and I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, while the front frame is unlocked, the number of game media stored in the storage means is determined by the seventh determination means. When the number of game media stored in the storage means determined by the seventh determination means changes while the front frame is unlocked, a predetermined notification is notified by the notification means. As a result, if an action that changes the number of game media stored in the storage means is performed while the front frame is unlocked, the action may be due to fraud. For example, the fraudulent behavior can be detected immediately.

  A storage means for storing game media, a launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means toward a game area, a recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and a recovery means A game machine for playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, and counting the number of game media that can be used in the game. Counting means, supply means for supplying game media from the storage means to the launch means, and detection means for detecting that the game medium is supplied from the storage means to the launch means by the supply means, The counting means updates the number of game media that can be used for a game when the detection means detects that game media has been supplied from the storage means to the launching means. Gaming machine K1, wherein Rukoto.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the game medium is stored by the storage means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, and the collection The game medium collected by the means is discharged by the discharge means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. At this time, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the counting means. Further, the game medium is supplied from the storing means to the launching means by the supplying means, and the supply is detected by the detecting means. Then, when the detection means detects that the game medium is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, the count means updates the number of game media that can be used for the game. Unless there is a special circumstance such as power interruption, if a game medium is supplied to the launching means, the game medium is launched and used for the game. Therefore, it is possible to count the game media used for the game without delay by updating the number of game media that can be used for the game when it is detected that the game media is supplied. effective.

  In the gaming machine K1, the launching means launches the gaming medium at a strength at which the gaming medium is guided to at least the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game medium supplied from the storage means is fired by the launching means at a strength at which the game medium is guided to at least the game area, so that the fired game medium is surely used for the game. Therefore, even if it is not confirmed whether or not the game medium is actually used for the game, the game medium that can be used for the game is triggered by the detection that the game medium is supplied from the storage means to the supply means. If the number is updated, there is an effect that the game media used for the game can be counted without delay.

  A storage means for storing game media, a launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means toward a game area, a recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and a recovery means Discharging means for discharging the collected game media to the storage means, and a game machine for playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, operating means operable by the player, and A gaming machine L1 comprising: stopping means for stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the game medium is stored by the storage unit, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is launched by the launch unit, the game medium launched by the launch unit is collected by the collection unit, and the collection The game medium collected by the means is discharged by the discharge means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. In addition, operation means operable by the player is provided, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the progress of the game is stopped by the stop means. As a result, the game progresses according to the player's intention by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means when the player becomes unable to launch the circulating game medium. Can be stopped. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage. In addition, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  The gaming machine L1 includes state determining means for determining whether or not the gaming machine is in a state where there is a problem with the progress of the game, and the stop means is in a state where the gaming machine has a problem with the progress of the game. The game machine L2 is characterized in that the game progress is stopped when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the gaming machine is in a state in which there is a problem with the progress of the game, the state determining means determines that when the predetermined operation is performed on the operating means, the progress of the game is stopped by the stopping means. Thereby, when there is a problem in the progress of the game, the player can stop the progress of the game in accordance with the player's intention by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage. In addition, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, when there is no problem in the progress of the game, the progress of the game is not stopped even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped unnecessarily even though the game can be performed.

  In the gaming machine L2, the state determination means determines whether or not there is a problem state related to the release of the game medium, and the stop means determines whether or not the problem state is related to the release of the game medium. The gaming machine L3 is characterized by stopping the progress of the game when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means as determined by the means.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the state determination unit determines that there is a problem state related to the release of the game medium and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit, the progress of the game is stopped by the stop unit. Here, the problem relating to the launch of the game medium includes not only the problem of the launching means itself, but also the problem that the game medium may not be used for the game even if the game medium is launched because the game medium is clogged in the game area. As a result, when there is a problem related to the launch of the game medium that is most deeply related to the player's profit, the player can perform a predetermined operation on the operation means so that the game progresses in accordance with the player's intention. Can be stopped. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage. In addition, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, if there is no problem regarding the launch of the game medium, the progress of the game is not stopped even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped unnecessarily even though the game can be performed.

  In the gaming machine L2, the state determination means determines whether or not there is a problem with the number of game media stored in the storage means, and the stop means stores the game media stored in the storage means. The gaming machine L4 is characterized by stopping the progress of the game when it is determined by the state determination means that there is a problem with the number, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the state determination unit determines that there is a problem with the number of game media stored in the storage unit and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit, the progress of the game is stopped by the stop unit. If the number of game media stored in the storage means is large, there is a possibility that an unauthorized game medium has been inserted into the gaming machine, and if the number of game media stored in the storage means is small, the game media is in the game area. There is a risk of clogging. Therefore, the state determination means determines that there is a problem with the number of game media stored in the storage means, and an illegal game medium is inserted by the player performing a predetermined operation on the operation means. When the game medium is jammed in the game area or the like, the progress of the game can be stopped according to the player's intention. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from suffering a disadvantage. In addition, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind. On the other hand, if there is no problem in the number of game media stored in the storage means, the progress of the game is not stopped even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped unnecessarily even though the game can be performed.

  A storage means for storing game media, a launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means toward a game area, a recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and a recovery means A game machine for playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, and counting the number of game media that can be used in the game. And a counting means for reducing the number of game media that can be used in the game by 1 when the game medium is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, and a power-off detection means for detecting that the power is cut off, When the power-off detection means detects that the power is turned off, even when the game medium is supplied to the launching means, and when the power is turned on And said departure A driving means for driving the means; and a falling game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium that has flowed down the game area after the launching means is driven by the driving means; and the counting means is the detection of the falling game medium A gaming machine M1 characterized in that, when a game medium flowing down the game area is detected by the means, the number of game media that can be used in the game is incremented by one.

  According to the gaming machine M1, the game medium is stored by the storage unit, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is launched by the launch unit, the game medium launched by the launch unit is collected by the collection unit, and the collection The game medium collected by the means is discharged by the discharge means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. In addition, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the counting means, and when the game media is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, at that stage, the number of game media that can be used for the game is reduced by one. It is. Further, when it is detected that the power is cut off by the power cut-off detecting means, even if a game medium is supplied to the launching means, the launch of the game medium is not executed. When the power is turned on, the launching means is driven by the driving means. Thereafter, when the game medium that has flowed down the game area is detected by the flow-down game medium detection means, the number of game media that can be used for the game is added by one by the counting means. As a result, game media that have not been used for a game due to power interruption are counted as game media that can be used for the game, so that it is possible to suppress a disadvantage to the player.

  In the gaming machine M1, the driving means drives the launching means regardless of whether or not a game medium is supplied to the launching means when power is turned on. Machine M2.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the power is turned on, the launching means is driven by the driving means regardless of whether or not the game medium is supplied to the launching means. Thereby, when it is detected that the power supply is cut off, after driving the launching means when the power is turned on without storing whether or not the game medium is supplied to the launching means, The game medium supplied to the launching means was left without being fired due to the fact that the game medium that flowed down the game area was detected by the flow-down game medium detecting means and that the power supply was cut off. There is an effect that it can be easily determined.

  A storage means for storing game media, a launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means toward a game area, a recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and a recovery means A game machine for playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, and counting the number of game media that can be used in the game. And a counting means for reducing the number of game media that can be used in the game by 1 when the game medium is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, and a power-off detection means for detecting that the power is cut off, When the power-off detection means detects that the power is turned off, even when the game medium is supplied to the launching means, and when the power is turned on And said departure Presence determination means for determining whether or not the game medium supplied to the means exists without being fired, and the presence judgment means determines that the game medium supplied to the firing means exists without being fired. And a driving means for driving the launching means, and the counting means adds one number of game media usable for a game when the launching means is driven by the driving means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the game medium is stored by the storage unit, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is launched by the launch unit, the game medium launched by the launch unit is collected by the collection unit, and the collection The game medium collected by the means is discharged by the discharge means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. In addition, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the counting means, and when the game media is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, at that stage, the number of game media that can be used for the game is reduced by one. It is. Further, when it is detected that the power is cut off by the power cut-off detecting means, even if a game medium is supplied to the launching means, the launch of the game medium is not executed. Then, when the power is turned on, the presence determining means determines whether or not the game medium supplied to the launching means exists without being fired, and as a result, the game medium supplied to the launching means is The driving means is driven by the driving means on the condition that it is determined that it exists without being fired. When the launching means is driven by the driving means, the number of game media that can be used for the game is added by 1 by the counting means. As a result, game media that have not been used for a game due to power interruption are counted as game media that can be used for the game, so that it is possible to suppress a disadvantage to the player. Further, since the launching means is driven only when it is determined that the game medium supplied to the launching means exists without being fired, the launching means is unnecessarily driven when there is no game medium in the launching means. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine N1 includes storage means for storing information when the game medium supplied to the launch means exists without being fired, and retains the information even when the power is turned off. When the power is turned on and the information is stored in the storage means, the judging means judges that the game medium supplied to the launching means exists without being fired. A gaming machine N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game medium supplied to the launching means exists without being fired, the information is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained while the power is turned off. Then, when the information is stored in the storage means when the power is turned on, it is determined by the presence determining means that the game medium supplied to the launching means is present without being fired, and the driving means emits the firing means. Is driven. Thereby, information when the power is turned off is retained even while the power is turned off, and it is determined whether or not the game medium supplied to the launching means exists without being fired based on the information. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination can be made with certainty.

  The gaming machine N1 includes game medium detection means for detecting whether or not there is a game medium supplied to the launching means, and the presence determination means is supplied to the launching means when the power is turned on. The gaming machine N3 is characterized in that if the game medium detecting means detects that a game medium is present, the game medium supplied to the launching means is determined to exist without being fired.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the following effects are produced. That is, it is detected by the game medium detection means whether or not there is a game medium supplied to the launching means. If the game medium detection means detects that there is a game medium supplied to the launching means when the power is turned on, the presence determination means causes the game medium supplied to the launch means to exist without being fired. Then, the firing means is driven by the drive means. Thereby, based on the detection result by the game medium detecting means, it is determined whether or not the game medium supplied to the launching means exists without being fired, so that it is possible to reliably perform the judgment. is there.

  A storage means for storing game media, a launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means toward a game area, a recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and a recovery means A game machine for playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, and counting the number of game media that can be used in the game. And a counting means for reducing the number of game media that can be used in the game by 1 when the game medium is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, and a power-off detection means for detecting that the power is cut off, If a game medium is present in the launching means when the power-off detection means detects that the power has been turned off, the launching means is driven so that the game medium does not reach the game area. , That A second driving means for returning the game medium to the storage means, and the counting means adds one number of game media usable for the game when the launching means is driven by the second driving means. A gaming machine O1 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine O1, the game medium is stored by the storage unit, the game medium supplied from the storage unit is launched by the launch unit, the game medium launched by the launch unit is collected by the collection unit, and the collection The game medium collected by the means is discharged by the discharge means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. In addition, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the counting means, and when the game media is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, at that stage, the number of game media that can be used for the game is reduced by one. It is. Further, when a game medium is present in the launching means when it is detected that the power is cut off by the power-off detecting means, the second drive means launches the game medium so that it does not reach the game area. The means is driven and the game medium is returned to the storage means. Then, when the launching means is driven by the second driving means, the number of game media that can be used for the game is added by 1 by the counting means. As a result, game media that have not been used for a game due to power interruption are counted as game media that can be used for the game, so that it is possible to suppress a disadvantage to the player.

  The gaming machine O1 includes signal generation means for generating a signal indicating that the firing means is driven by the second drive means, and the counting means is based on the signal generated by the signal generation means, A gaming machine O2 that adds one to the number of gaming media that can be used for gaming.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the power-off detection means detects that the power is cut off, if there is a game medium in the launch means, the second drive means launches the game medium so that it does not reach the game area. When the means is driven, a signal indicating that the means is driven is generated by the signal generating means. Then, based on the signal generated by the signal generation means, the number of game media usable for the game is added by 1 by the counting means. Thereby, after the launching means is driven by the second driving means, the number of game media that can be used for the game can be immediately added by the signal. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game media that can be used for the game can be reliably updated while the voltage is continuously applied.

  In the gaming machine O1, the game machine O1 includes return game medium detection means for detecting a game medium launched by the launch means and returned to the storage means without reaching the game area, and the counting means includes: When the launching means is driven by the second driving means, and then the game medium is detected by the return game medium detecting means, the number of game media that can be used for the game is added by one. A gaming machine O3.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are produced. That is, when the launching means is driven by the second driving means, and the game medium returned to the storage means without reaching the game area is detected by the return game medium detecting means, the game medium usable for the game is detected. The number is added by 1 by the counting means. As a result, when the launching means is driven by the second driving means, the game medium returned to the storage means without reaching the game area is detected by the return game medium detecting means and used for the game. The number of possible game media can be added by one. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of game media that can be used for the game can be correctly updated.

  A storage means for storing game media, a launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means toward a game area, a recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and a recovery means A game machine for playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine, and counting the number of game media that can be used in the game. And a counting means for reducing the number of game media that can be used in the game by 1 when the game medium is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, and a power-off detection means for detecting that the power is cut off, When it is detected that the power is cut off by the power cut-off detecting means, the stopping means for stopping the game medium flowing down the game area on the upstream side of the collecting means, and when the power is turned on, Stop Discharge means for discharging to the collection means while detecting game media stopped by the stage one by one, and each time the game medium is detected by the discharge means, the counting means A gaming machine P1 characterized by adding 1 to the number of usable game media.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the game medium is stored by the storage means, the game medium supplied from the storage means is launched by the launch means, the game medium launched by the launch means is collected by the collection means, and the collection The game medium collected by the means is discharged by the discharge means, so that a game is played while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine. In addition, the number of game media that can be used for the game is counted by the counting means, and when the game media is supplied from the storage means to the launching means, at that stage, the number of game media that can be used for the game is reduced by one. It is. Further, when it is detected by the power cut detection means that the power is cut off, the game medium flowing down the game area is stopped by the stop means upstream of the collection means. The game media stopped by the stopping means are discharged to the collecting means while being detected one by one by the discharging means when the power is turned on. Each time a game medium is detected by the ejecting means, the number of game media that can be used for the game is added by one by the counting means. Here, the game medium flowing down the game area when the power is turned off is not used for the game. Therefore, since game media that have not been used for games are counted as game media that can be used for games, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  The gaming machine P2 is characterized in that the stopping means discharges the game medium flowing down the game area to the collecting means without stopping while a normal game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the game medium that has flowed down the gaming area is not stopped by the stopping means while the normal game is being played, and is discharged to the collecting means. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a flow path so that the game medium does not pass through the stopping means while a normal game is performed, so that the configuration can be simplified.

  Based on signals from the main control means, including main control means for performing main control of the game and a signal indicating information on the result of the lottery, whether or not to enter a special gaming state advantageous to the player And a slave control means for performing control, wherein the master control means transmits a signal to be transmitted to the slave control means and a signal having an opposite phase to each other using two signal lines. A gaming machine Q1 comprising transmission means for transmitting by a differential transmission method.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, the main control means draws whether or not to enter a special game state advantageous to the player, and performs main control of the game. In addition, the control is performed by the sub control means based on the signal from the main control means including the signal indicating the information related to the lottery result as to whether or not to enter the special game state. Here, a signal transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit is transmitted by the transmission unit by a differential transmission method in which signals of opposite phases are transmitted to each other using two signal lines. Thus, even if an unauthorized board is connected between the main control means and the slave control means and an illegal signal is transmitted to the slave control means, an attempt to create an unfairly advantageous state for the player is possible. Since the signal transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit is transmitted using two signal lines, it is difficult to transmit an illegal signal to the sub control unit. Therefore, there is an effect that such an illegal act can be suppressed.

  Gaming machine A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1-E4, F1-F3, G1-G3, H1, I1, J1, K1, K2, L1-L4, M1, M2, N1- One of N3, O1 to O3, P1, P2, and Q1, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine R1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machine A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1-E4, F1-F3, G1-G3, H1, I1, J1, K1, K2, L1-L4, M1, M2, N1- A gaming machine R2 according to any one of N3, O1 to O3, P1, P2, and Q1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machine A1, A2, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1-E4, F1-F3, G1-G3, H1, I1, J1, K1, K2, L1-L4, M1, M2, N1- In any one of N3, O1 to O3, P1, P2, and Q1, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

6 Out mouth (part of collection means)
10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
14 Door frame (front frame)
21a Cylinder lock (instruction receiving part)
41a Collection passage (part of collection means)
42a Discharge passage (discharge means)
64 Foul ball passage (part of collection means)
65 Supply passage (storage means)
66 Ball launch unit (launching means)
91 51 ball detection switch (part of the first determination means)
92 50 ball detection switch (part of the first determination means)
99 Electronic lock (key part)
213e Ball collection time counting counter (first counting means)
S1207 Change start processing (lottery means)
S2105 (third judging means)
S2106 Second ball number determination process (part of second determination means)
S2404 Third ball number determination means (part of second determination means)
S2405 (Unlocking means)
S2704 Third ball number determining means (part of second determining means)
S2804 Third ball number determining means (part of second determining means)

Claims (2)

Storage means for storing game media, launching means for launching game media supplied from the storage means, recovery means for recovering game media launched by the launch means, and game media recovered by the recovery means A game machine for playing a game while circulating a predetermined number of game media in the machine,
First determination means for determining the number of game media stored in the storage means;
The game media stored in the storage means determined by the first determination means when all of the predetermined number of game media circulating in the gaming machine should be stored in the storage means Second judging means for judging whether or not the number is the predetermined number;
And a notification means for performing a predetermined notification when it is determined by the second determination means that the number of game media stored in the storage means is different from the predetermined number. A gaming machine. When a time required for one game medium to be collected by the collecting unit and discharged to the storing unit by the discharging unit and stored by the discharging unit is set as the first time,
The gaming machine is
First counting means for counting an elapsed time since the game medium was fired by the launching means;
Third judging means for judging whether or not the elapsed time counted from the first counting means for the game medium fired immediately before by the launching means is equal to or longer than the first time; With
The second determining means is third when the elapsed time counted by the first counting means with respect to the game medium fired immediately before by the launching means becomes equal to or longer than the first time. The storage determined by the first determination unit when the determination unit determines that all of the predetermined number of game media circulating in the gaming machine should be stored in the storage unit. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein it is determined whether or not the number of game media stored in the means is the predetermined number.

Images